Contents

Subaru Impreza 2.0i Sport Sedan 2019 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 488
1 of 488

Summary of Content for Subaru Impreza 2.0i Sport Sedan 2019 Owner's Manual PDF

(1,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 19

Forewordoreword SFWAA

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system forminimizing emission pollutants.We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer. The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave thismanual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

SUBARU and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION. *C Copyright 2018 SUBARU CORPORATION

(2,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 19

Vehicle types SFWAB

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

1) Sedan 2) 5-door models

(2,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

(3,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S00Warranties S00AA

& Warranties for U.S.A. S00AA01

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties: . SUBARU Limited Warranties . Federal Emission Control Systems Warranties . California Emissions Control Sys- tems Warranties

All warranty information, including applic- ability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada S00AA05

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties: . SUBARU Limited Warranty . Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applic- ability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Service Booklet. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada

S00AA06 All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owners Manual

S00AB

& Using your Owners Manual S00AB01

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air- bags This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precau- tions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you about the opera- tion of instrument panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches.

CONTINUED

1

0

(4,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Chapter 4: Climate control This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control. Chapter 5: Audio This chapter informs you about your audio system. Chapter 6: Interior equipment This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment. Chapter 7: Starting and operating This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU. Chapter 8: Driving tips This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and ex- plains some safety tips on driving. Chapter 9: In case of emergency This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem, such as a flat tire or engine overheating. Chapter 10: Appearance care This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs youwhen you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications This chapter informs you about dimen- sions and capacities of your SUBARU. Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards and Report- ing safety defects. Chapter 14: Index This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

For models with the EyeSight system: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

& Safety warnings S00AB02

You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to poten- tial hazards that could result in injury to you or others. Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual care- fully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTE A NOTE gives information or sugges- tions how to make better use of your vehicle.

2

(5,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Safety symbol S00AB03

You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation list S00AB04

You may find several abbreviations in this manual. The meanings of the abbrevia- tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditioner ABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock index ALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR Automatic locking retractor/ Emergency locking retractor

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA Blind Spot Detection/Rear Cross Traffic Alert

CVT Continuously variable trans- mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD Electronic brake force distri- bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

INT Intermittent

Abbreviation Meaning

LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for children

LED Light emitting diode MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man- ganese tricarbonyl

MT Manual transmission OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Braking RON Research octane number

SRF Steering responsive fog lights system

SRH Steering Responsive Head- light

SRS Supplemental restraint sys- tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem

3

0

(6,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Vehicle symbols S00AC

There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. For warning and indicator lights, refer to Warning and indicator lights F23.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care- fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety precautions when driving

S00AD

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag S00AD01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Other- wise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or acci- dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS (Supple- mental Restraint System) airbag does not do awaywith the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections. . For the seatbelt system, refer to Seat- belts F1-12. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem airbag) F1-41.

4

(7,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Child safety S00AD02

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passen- ger and objects inside the vehi- cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be seated in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Place children in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- CING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks to the LOCK position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out. Refer to Child safety locks F2-30.

. Always lock the passengers win- dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Re- fer to Windows F2-31.

. Never leave unattended children, adults or animals in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the ve- hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high en- ough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.

. Help prevent children, adults or animals from locking themselves in the trunk. On hot or sunny days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly become high en- ough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small chil- dren.

. When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors. Also make certain that the trunk is closed.

CONTINUED

5

0

(8,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections. . For the seatbelt system, refer to Seat- belts F1-12. . For the child restraint system, refer to Child restraint systems F1-26. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem airbag) F1-41.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

S00AD03

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dan- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas fromentering the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve- hicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila- tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system al- ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving S00AD04

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- stream delays your reaction time and impairs your perception, judg- ment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking even if you drink just a little it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the severity of that injury. Please dont drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of themost frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have con- sumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.

6

(9,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Drugs and driving S00AD05

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers and other persons risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies themedication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking anymedications that canmake you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy S00AD06

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction time will be delayed and your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers and other per- sons chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driving with others.

& Modification of your vehicle S00AD07

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified other than with genuine SUBARU parts and accessories. Other types of modifications could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be cov- ered under warranties.

& Use of cell phones/texting and driving

S00AD16

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and lead to an accident. If you use a cell phone to talk or text, first pull off the road and park in a safe place. In some States/ Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on a phone while driving, but only if the phone is hands-free.

CONTINUED

7

0

(10,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Driving vehicles equipped with navigation system

S00AD09

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract your attention from driving. Also, do not operate the controls of the navigation system while driving. The loss of attention to driving could lead to an accident. If you wish to operate the controls of the naviga- tion system, first take the vehicle off the road and stop it in a safe location.

& Driving with pets S00AD10

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- strain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be secured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carriers handle.

Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passengers seat. For further infor- mation, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop.

& Tire pressures S00AD11

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres- sure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. For detailed information, refer to Tires and wheels F11-21.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly be- come hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

& Attaching accessories S00AD15

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories, labels or stickers (other than properly placed inspection stick- ers) to the windshield. Such items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an accessory (such as an electronic toll collection (ETC) device or security pass) to the windshield, consult your SUBARU dealer for details on the proper location.

8

(11,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

General information S00AK

& California Perchlorate Advi- sory

S00AK03 Certain vehicle components such as air- bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless entry transmitter batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the vehicle S00AK01

NOTE You may hear a noise from under the vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. This noise is caused by the operation of the fuel evaporation leakage checking sys- tem and the operation is normal. The noise will stop after approximately 15 minutes.

& Event data recorder S00AK04

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: . How various systems in your vehicle were operating; . Whether or not the driver and passen- ger safety belts were buckled/fastened; . How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, . How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac- quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the informa- tion if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

9

0

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6 Left Page

(1,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2

Instruments and controls

Climate control 4

Audio 5

Interior equipment 6

Starting and operating 7

Driving tips 8

In case of emergency 9

Appearance care 10

Maintenance and service 11

Specifications 12

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13

Index 14

3

(14,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Illustrated index S00AE

& Exterior S00AE01

1) Engine hood (page 11-5) 2) Windshield wiper (page 3-76) 3) Headlight (page 3-66) 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-38) 5) Moonroof (page 2-37) 6) Roof rails (page 8-12) 7) Outside mirror (page 3-87) 8) Door locks (page 2-24) 9) Tire pressure (page 11-23) 10) Flat tires (page 9-6) 11) Snow tires (page 8-9) 12) Fog light (page 3-73) 13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14) 14) Towing hook (page 9-14)

12

(15,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Rear window defogger (page 3-88) 2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 3) Child safety locks (page 2-30) 4) Tie-down hole (page 9-14) 5) Replacing bulbs (page 11-38) 6) Trunk lid (page 2-33) 7) Rear gate (page 2-36) 8) Towing hook (page 9-14) 9) Rear window wiper (page 3-78)

CONTINUED

13

0

(16,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Interior S00AE02

! Passenger compartment area S00AE0201

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 1-35)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-12) 3) Front seat (page 1-2) 4) Rear seat (page 1-2) 5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

NOTE For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU STARLINK: Refer to the Owners Man- ual supplement for SUBARUSTARLINK Safety and Security.

14

(17,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Power windows (page 2-31) 2) Door locks (page 2-24) 3) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-87) 4) Glove box (page 6-5) 5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7) 6) Shift lever (MT models) (page 7-21)/

Select lever (CVT models) (page 7-23) 7) Parking brake lever (page 7-40) 8) Seat heater switches (page 1-10) 9) Cup holder (page 6-6) 10) Center console (page 6-6)

CONTINUED

15

0

(18,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Instrument panel S00AE03

1) Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch (page 3-73)/Steering Responsive Headlight off switch (page 3-71)

2) Illumination brightness control (page 3-12)

3) Combination meter (page 3-9) 4) Type A multi-function display (black and

white) (page 3-41)/Type B multi-function display (color LCD) (page 3-46)

5) Audio and navigation system* 6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8) 7) Climate control (page 4-2) 8) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 3-89) 9) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-49) 10) Fuse box (page 11-37) 11) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5) 12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 7-37) *: For details about how to use the audio and navigation system, refer to the sepa- rate navigation/audio Owners Manual.

NOTE For models with the EyeSight system: Refer to the Owners Manual supple- ment for the EyeSight system.

16

(19,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Audio control switches* 2) INFO button for type A multi-function

display (black and white) (page 3-41)/ INFO button for type B multi-function display (color LCD) (page 3-46)

3) Cruise control (page 7-45) 4) Shift paddle (page 7-26) 5) Heated Steering Wheel switch

(page 3-90) 6) SRS airbag (page 1-41) 7) Horn (page 3-91) 8) Combination meter display (color LCD)

control switches (page 3-34) 9) Talk switch for voice command system*/

Hands-free phone switches* *: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the separate naviga- tion/audio Owners Manual.

CONTINUED

17

0

(20,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches S00AE04

1) Windshield wiper (page 3-76) 2) Mist (page 3-76) 3) Windshield washer (page 3-77) 4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-78) 5) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-77) 6) Wiper control lever (page 3-76) 7) Light control switch (page 3-65) 8) Fog light switch (page 3-73) 9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-66) 10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change

(page 3-67) 11) Turn signal lever (page 3-74)

18

(21,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Combination meter S00AE05

! U.S.-spec. models (type A) S00AE0538

The illustration above is a typical example. For somemodels, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-9) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9) 4) Speedometer (page 3-9) 5) ECO gauge (page 3-11) 6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

CONTINUED

19

0

(22,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! U.S.-spec. models (type B) S00AE0549

The illustration above is a typical example. For somemodels, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-9) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 3-34) 4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9) 5) Speedometer (page 3-9) 6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

20

(23,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A) S00AE0531

The illustration above is a typical example. For somemodels, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-9) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9) 4) Speedometer (page 3-9) 5) ECO gauge (page 3-11) 6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

CONTINUED

21

0

(24,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B) S00AE0519

The illustration above is a typical example. For somemodels, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-9) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-31) 3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 3-34) 4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9) 5) Speedometer (page 3-9) 6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

22

(25,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Warning and indicator lights S00AE06

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-14

Front passengers seatbelt warning light 3-14

SRS airbag system warning light 3-15

Front passengers frontal airbag ON indi- cator

3-15

Front passengers frontal airbag OFF in- dicator

3-15

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunc- tion indicator light

3-16

Coolant temperature low indicator light/ Coolant temperature high warning light

3-17

Charge warning light 3-18

Oil pressure warning light 3-18

Engine oil level warn- ing light 3-18

Mark Name Page

AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) 3-19

ABS warning light 3-20

Brake system warning light 3-21

/ Door open warning light 3-22

AWD warning light (CVT models) 3-23

Power steering warn- ing light 3-23

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light

3-22

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi- cator light

3-24

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

3-25

Turn signal indicator lights 3-31

High beam indicator light 3-31

Mark Name Page

High beam assist indi- cator light (if equipped) 3-31

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (if equipped)

3-32

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/Steering Respon- sive Headlight OFF in- dicator light (if equipped)

3-32

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) 3-32

Access key warning indicator (if equipped) 3-25

Security indicator light 3-30

Headlight indicator light (if equipped) 3-32

Cruise control indica- tor light (if equipped) 3-32

Cruise control set indi- cator light (if equipped) 3-32

CONTINUED

23

0

(26,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Mark Name Page

Low fuel warning light 3-22

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

3-19

Windshield washer fluid warning light 3-19

Steering responsive fog lights warning indi- cator/Steering respon- sive fog lights OFF indicator (if equipped)

3-33

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) 3-33

BSD/RCTA OFF indi- cator (if equipped) 3-33

RAB warning indicator (if equipped) 3-33

RAB OFF indicator (if equipped) 3-33

Icy road surface warn- ing indicator (if equipped)

3-33

24

(27,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Function settings S00AF

& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD) S00AF01

If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed within the display to meet your personal requirements. NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting changes to the following items will need to be performed by a SUBARU dealer. Refer toFunction settings and adjustments performed by a dealer F28.

Item Available settings Factory default setting

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-

tion 1st menu/vehicle sys- tem

2nd menu/adjustable vehicle system setting

3rd menu/selectable ve- hicle system setting

Screen Settings

Welcome Screen On/Off On 3-35 Good-bye Screen On/Off On 3-35

Gauge Initial Movement On/Off On 3-39

Units km, km/h, Liter/mile, MPH, Gallon

U.S.-spec models: mile, MPH, Gallon Other models: km, km/h, Liter

3-40

Tire Pressure Units (if equipped) kPa/PSi PSi 3-40

Languages English/Espaol/Fran- ais

U.S.-spec models: Eng- lish Other models: Franais

3-40

CONTINUED

25

0

(28,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Item Available settings Factory default setting

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-

tion 1st menu/vehicle sys- tem

2nd menu/adjustable vehicle system setting

3rd menu/selectable ve- hicle system setting

Warning Volume* Max/Mid/Min Mid

7-54 and 7-67 For details about EyeSight sys- tem, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

EyeSight (models with EyeSight system)

Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound On/Off On

Refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function On/Off On

Cruise Control Accel- eration Characteristics*

Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.2 (Com- fort)/Lv.1 (ECO)

Lv.3 (Standard)

RAB (if equipped) Sonar Audible Alarm On/Off On 7-67

26

(29,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Item Available settings Factory default setting

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-

tion 1st menu/vehicle sys- tem

2nd menu/adjustable vehicle system setting

3rd menu/selectable ve- hicle system setting

Vehicle Setting

Keyless Entry System

Audible Signal (if equipped) On/Off On 2-16

Hazard Warning Flasher On/Off On 3-40

Security Relocking (if equipped)

20 seconds/30 seconds/ 40 seconds/50 seconds/ 60 seconds/Off

30 seconds 3-40

Driver Door Unlock (if equipped) Drivers Door Only/All Drivers Door Only 2-11

Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped) Rear Gate Only/All Rear Gate/Trunk Only 3-40

Defogger 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 3-88

Interior Light 10 seconds/20 seconds/ 30 seconds/Off 30 seconds 6-3

Auto Light Sensor (if equipped) Low/Normal/High/Very

high High 3-66

Welcome Lighting (if equipped)

Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 90 seconds/Off 30 seconds 3-66

Leaving Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 90 seconds/Off 30 seconds 3-66

One-touch lane changer On/Off On 3-75 Default Settings No/Yes 3-41

*: You can also set this while driving.

CONTINUED

27

0

(30,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display (color LCD) S00AF02

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-22

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-29

& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer S00AF03

A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Keyless Access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Door unlock selection function (dri- vers door unlock)

Drivers door only/All doors Drivers door only

Door unlock selection function (rear gate unlock) (5-door models)

Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Remote trunk open function (sedan) Trunk lid opener function with ac- cess key fob/remote transmitter

Operation/Non-operation Operation

Battery drainage prevention func- tion

Battery drainage prevention func- tion

Operation/Non-operation Operation

28

(31,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Alarm system Dome light, cargo area light, and

map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF

Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors)

0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto dimmer cancel (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer cancel

OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the

auto on/off headlights Low/Normal/High/Very high High

Auto on/off wiper-linked headlights (if equipped)

Auto-on/off wiper-linked Operation/Non-operation Operation

High beam assist function (if equipped)

High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer

Operation/Non-operation Operation

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper (5-door models)

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Operation/Non-operation U.S.-spec models: Non-operation Other models: Operation

Defogger and deicer system for models with the automatic climate control system

Rear window defogger, outside mir- ror defogger and windshield wiper deicer

Operation for 15 minutes/Continu- ous operation

Operation for 15 minutes

Dome light/Map lights/Cargo area light (5-door models)

Operation of dome light/map light/ cargo area light OFF delay timer

OFF/10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds

30 seconds

29

0

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6 Left Page

(33,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S01 Seats ........................................................................ 1-2

Safety tips ............................................................. 1-2 Front seats ............................................................ 1-5 Rear seats ............................................................. 1-6 Head restraint ........................................................ 1-8

Seat heater (if equipped) ...................................... 1-10 Safety precautions ................................................1-10 Operation.............................................................. 1-11

Seatbelts................................................................ 1-12 Seatbelt safety tips ...............................................1-12 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)......................1-14 Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)............................................1-14

Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................1-14 Fastening the seatbelt...........................................1-14 Seatbelt maintenance............................................1-21

Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... 1-21 Drivers seatbelt....................................................1-22 Front passengers seatbelt ....................................1-23 System monitors...................................................1-25 System servicing ..................................................1-25 Precautions against vehicle modification...............1-25

Child restraint systems ........................................ 1-26 Safety tips for installing child restraint systems ....1-27 Where to place a child restraint system.................1-28

Choosing a child restraint system......................... 1-30 Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt ............................................................. 1-30

Installing a booster seat ....................................... 1-34 Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................ 1-35

Top tether anchorages .......................................... 1-39 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ................................................................ 1-41 General precautions regarding SRS airbag system .............................................................. 1-41

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system for accessories and any objects............. 1-43

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system and children .......................................... 1-46

Components......................................................... 1-49 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-51 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ............... 1-62 SRS airbag system monitors................................. 1-70 SRS airbag system servicing ................................ 1-71 Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-72 How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system.................................................... 1-73

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1

(34,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Seats S01AQ

& Safety tips S01AQ01

! Safety tips for seat S01AQ0101

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv- ing to avoid loss of vehicle con- trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers and cargo are clear of the adjusting mechan- ism.

. After adjusting the seat, move it back and forth to make sure it is securely locked. If the seat is not securely locked, it may move or the seatbelt may not operate properly.

. Do not put objects under the front seats. They may interfere with front seat locking and cause an accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi- tion while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop- erly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deploy- ment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL chil- dren (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats1-2

(35,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precau- tions concerning child restraint sys- tems, refer to Child restraint sys- tems F1-26.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid- ing under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seat- back. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion. Doing so may lead to defective operation of the following systems and could result in serious injury. . Occupant detection system . SRS side airbag . Seat heater (if equipped) . Power seat (if equipped)

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats 1-3

1

(36,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

! Safety tips for head restraint S01AQ0102

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Also, never install the head restraints the opposite way round. Doing so will prevent the head restraints from function- ing as intended. Therefore, when you remove the head restraints, you must reinstall all head re- straints correctly to protect vehi- cle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri- ver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to mini- mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats1-4

(37,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Front seats S01AQ02

! Manual seat (if equipped) S01AQ0201

! Forward and backward adjust- ment

S01AQ020101

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then release the lever and try to move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place.

! Reclining the seatback S01AQ020102

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place. The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when the lever is pulled. While operating the lever to return the seatback, hold the seatback lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

! Seat height adjustment (drivers seat)

S01AQ020103

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat is lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the seat adjustment lever up and down.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats 1-5

1

(38,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Power seat (drivers seat if equipped)

S01AQ0202

1) Seat position forward/backward con- trol switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward. During forward/backward ad- justment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion height.

2) Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.

3) Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.

& Rear seats S01AQ03

! Armrest (if equipped) S01AQ0301

To use the armrest, pull on the top edge of the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengers must never be allowed to sit on the center armrest.

! Folding down the rear seatback S01AQ0302

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat- back, check that there are no passengers or objects on the rear seat. Not doing so creates a risk of injury or property damage if the seatback suddenly folds down.

. Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area or trunk. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneu- ver or a rapid acceleration.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats1-6

(39,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock release knob and then fold the seatback down.

! Return the rear seatback S01AQ0303

WARNING

When returning the seatback to its original position, observe the fol- lowing precaution. Failure to observe the precaution may damage the seatbelt, impairing its effectiveness, and possibly re- sult in a serious injury. . When returning the seatback to

its original position, pull the seatbelt out towards the vehicle exterior so that it will not be caught between the seatback and the trim.

Lock release knob 1) Unlocked 2) Locked A) Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until it locks into place and make sure that the unlock- ing marker on the lock release knob is no longer visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to its original position, check that the unlocking marker on the lock re- lease knob is not visible. Also, move the seatback back and forth to confirm that it is securely fixed in place. If the seatback is not securely fixed in place, the seatback may

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats 1-7

1

(40,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

suddenly fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area or trunk, which could cause serious injury or death.

& Head restraint S01AQ04

WARNING

The front seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the front seats only. The rear seat head restraints are designed to be in- stalled into the rear seats only. Do not attempt to install the front seat head restraints into the rear seats, or the rear seat head restraints into the front seats.

NOTE It is possible to adjust the angle of the front seat head restraints only. When installing the front seat head restraints, make sure that the angle of the head restraints can be adjusted.

! Front seats S01AQ0401

Both the drivers seat and the front passengers seat are equipped with head restraints. Both head restraints are adjus- table in the following ways.

! Height adjustment S01AQ040101

1) Head restraint 2) Release button

To raise: Pull the head restraint up. To lower: Push the head restraint down while press- ing the release button on the top of the seatback. To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupants ears.

NOTE When the head restraint cannot be pulled out or installed due to insuffi- cient clearance between the head re- straint and the roof, tilt the seat and then perform the installation and re- moval tasks.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats1-8

(41,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Angle adjustment S01AQ040102

The angle of the head restraint can be adjusted in several steps. While maintain- ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the head restraint to a position where the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

To tilt: Tilt the head restraint by hand to the preferred position. A click will be audible when the head restraint is locked. To return: Tilt the head restraint once as far forward as it can go. The head restraint will automatically return to the fully upright position. Then, adjust the head restraint again to the preferred angle.

! Rear seats S01AQ0402

Both the rear window side seats and the rear center seat are equipped with head restraints.

! Rear windows side seating posi- tion

S01AQ040201

1) Head restraint 2) Release button

To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint. To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

After installing the head restraint, make sure it is securely locked.

! Rear center seating position S01AQ040202

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to be used at the retracted position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended posi- tion.

1) Incorrect (retracted position) 2) Correct (extended position)

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats 1-9

1

(42,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Head restraint 2) Release button

To raise: Pull the head restraint up. To lower: Push the head restraint down while press- ing the release button on the top of the seatback. To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint. To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the extended position. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibi- lity.

Seat heater (if equipped) S01AB

The seat heater is equipped in the front seats.

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position.

& Safety precautions S01AB03

CAUTION

. People with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When using the heater, always be sure to warn the persons con- cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the seat heater.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater1-10

(43,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

& Operation S01AB04

1) HI Rapid heating 2) LO Normal heating 3) Off A) Left-hand side B) Right-hand side

To turn on the seat heater, push the LO or HI position on the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. Selecting the HI position will cause the seat to heat up quicker.

To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the opposite side of the current position.

The indicator located on the switch illumi- nates when the seat heater is in operation.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater 1-11

1

(44,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Seatbelts S01AE

& Seatbelt safety tips S01AE01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Other- wise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or acci- dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to sup- port only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more per- sons even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attach- ing hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire as- sembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a colli- sion, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright posi- tion while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt by the front

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts1-12

(45,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

passenger when any of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploy. ! Infants or small children

S01AE0101 Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. Refer to Child restraint systems F1-26. ! Children

S01AE0102

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop- erly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deploy- ment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL chil- dren (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all

times. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precau- tions concerning the child restraint system, refer to Child restraint systems F1-26.

If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Take care to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be

properly positioned, use a child restraint system. Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back. ! Expectant mothers

S01AE0103

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-13

1

(46,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ELR)

S01AE02 The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

& Automatic LockingRetractor/ Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR)

S01AE03 Each passengers seatbelt has an Auto- matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ ELR has an additional locking mode Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode intended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, change the seatbelt to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

After removing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt retracts fully and the retractor returned to the Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode. For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, refer to Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt F1-30.

& Seatbelt warning light and chime S01AE04

Refer to Seatbelt warning light and chime F3-14.

& Fastening the seatbelt S01AE06

! Front seatbelts S01AE0601

1. Adjust the seat position according to the following procedure. Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control. Front passengers seat: Adjust the seat- back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat. 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts1-14

(47,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

S01AE060101

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

To raise: Pull the release knob and slide the anchor up. To lower: Pull the release knob and slide the anchor down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt S01AE060102

1. Push the button on the buckle. 2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-15

1

(48,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt on 5-door models)

S01AE0602 1. Sit well back in the seat. 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt S01AE060201

1. Push the button on the buckle. 2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts1-16

(49,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Rear center seatbelt on 5-door models

S01AE0603

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate 2) Connector (tongue) 3) Connector (buckle) 4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web- bing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, espe- cially when inserting the connec- tors tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.

WARNING

. Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the connec- tors tongue plate not fastened to the connectors buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot prop- erly restrain the wearer in posi- tion in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.

. The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position. Otherwise, in an acci- dent, serious injury or death could result.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-17

1

(50,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1. Raise the head restraint to the ex- tended position. Do not remove the head restraint.

2. Remove the tongue plate from the belt holder on the right side of the cargo area and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it through the belt guide as follows: First insert one edge of the belt into the open gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of the belt in, so that the whole belt fits inside.

4. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the connector (tongue) attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click is heard.

. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts1-18

(51,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle until it clicks.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt S01AE060301

1. Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE When the seatback is folded down for greater cargo area, it is necessary to disconnect the connector.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-19

1

(52,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard pointed object into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in. The connector (tongue) plate will then disconnect from the buckle.

3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue) into the belt holder.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the tongue plate could hit against the trim, causing damage to the trim. . Do not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly. . Have the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the tongue plates are neatly stored.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts1-20

(53,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Seatbelt maintenance S01AE07

To clean the seatbelts, use amild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re- place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica- tions or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating prop- erly.

Seatbelt pretensioners S01AF

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. . Drivers seatbelt . Front passengers seatbelt

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal and side collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright position with their seat- belts properly fastened. Refer to Seatbelts F1-12.

. Do not modify, remove or strike the seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt preten- sioners or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activa- tion of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inop- erative, possibly resulting in ser- ious injury. Seatbelt preten- sioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, consult

your SUBARU dealer. . When discarding seatbelt retrac-

tor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or scrap- ping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- signed to activate in minor impacts or in rear impacts. . Pretensioners are designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the drivers and front passengers seatbelt retractor assemblies should be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- belt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts. . If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos- sible.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners 1-21

1

(54,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with seatbelt preten- sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the contents of this section.

& Drivers seatbelt S01AF08

The drivers seatbelt has a shoulder belt pretensioner.

Front seatbelt pretensioner The pretensioner sensor also serves as follows. . SRS frontal airbag sensor . Side impact sensor . Front door impact sensor . Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predeter- mined amount of force during frontal or side collisions or rollover accidents, any seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The drivers seatbelt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced. ! In cases of rollover accident, frontal

collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously

S01AF0801 For details, refer to In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side colli- sions, the following components will oper- ate simultaneously F1-24.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners1-22

(55,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Front passengers seatbelt S01AF09

The front passengers seatbelt has a shoulder belt and a lap belt pretensioner.

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder belt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter)

2) Lap belt pretensioner

On the front passengers side, the shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen- ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is located at the base of the center pillar. Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of frontal collision force is detected. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more effectively. The front passengers seatbelt preten- sioner includes a tension reducing device

which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision. The adaptive force limiter will select a reducing load to the suit body size of occupant as detected by the occupant detection sensor.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re- mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners 1-23

1

(56,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously S01AF0901

Drivers side seatbelt pre- tensioner

Front passen- gers side

shoulder belt pretensioner

Front passen- gers side lap belt preten-

sioner

SRS frontal airbag for dri-

ver

SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

SRS curtain airbags

SRS side air- bags

Rollover accidents * * * both sides

Frontal collisions * * * * **1

Offset frontal collisions * * * * **1 *

both sides

Side collisions **3 **4 * impacted side

**2

impacted side Rear impact

Minor impact

*: Activated : Not activated

*1: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag operation. *2: When both the satellite safing sensor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force. *3: When both the satellite safing sensor and the drivers side front door impact sensor sense an impact force. However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate. *4: When both the satellite safing sensor and the front passengers side front door impact sensor sense an impact force. However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners1-24

(57,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& System monitors S01AF03

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner with the ignition switch in the ON position. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the SRS airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. For details, refer to SRS airbag system monitors F1-70.

& System servicing S01AF04

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re- tractor assembly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting the systems wiring could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner andSRSairbag sys- tems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, con- sult your nearest SUBARU deal- er.

CAUTION

For the locations of the sensors and SRS airbag control module, refer to Components F1-49. If you need service or repair in the areas where the sensors and SRS airbag modules are stored, or near the front seatbelt retractors, have the work performed by your author- ized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE If the front or side part of the vehicle is damaged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehicle modification

S01AF05 Always consult your SUBARUdealer if you want to install any accessory parts to your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners. . Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.

. Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers door pillar or specified for indivi- dual vehicle models in this Own- ers Manual.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners 1-25

1

(58,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Child restraint systems S01AG

Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the childs age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those described in Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) F1-35).

Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, care- fully follow themanufacturers instructions.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

Lock release knob 1) Unlocked 2) Locked A) Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap or in his or her arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-26

(59,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re- strained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injured seriously. Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

& Safety tips for installing child restraint systems

S01AG16

WARNING

. Do not use a seat belt extender. If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint sys- tem, the seat belt will not se- curely hold the child restraint system. Use of a seat belt exten- der could cause death or serious injury to children or other pas- sengers in sudden braking, swer- ving, or accidents.

. Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in- side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occu- pants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-27

1

(60,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased.

& Where to place a child re- straint system

S01AG01 The following are SUBARUs recommen- dations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

A: Front passengers seat You should not install a child restraint system (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passengers airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating positions Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems. In these positions, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system.

. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat- belts . Lower anchorages (bars) . Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro- vided in this position. Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt. When you install a child restraint system in the rear seats center seating position, raise the center head restraint. Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side seating positions may be used for a seat in

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-28

(61,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

the center seating position if a child restraint system manufacturers instruc- tions permit and specify using anchors as far apart as those in this vehicle. If a child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you should install the child restraint system in a rear seat, window-side seating position.

WARNING

. Evenwith advanced airbags, chil- dren can be seriously injured by the airbag. Place children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint de- vices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is appro-

priate for the childs age, height and weight. According to acci- dent statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages (bars) for a seat in the center seating position unless a child restraint system manufacturers instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced as far apart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two ormore lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

WARNING

. SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN- GERS SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN- STALL A CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- CING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Do not allow children to lean their heads or other body parts against the door of the vehicle, or the areas around the door. Deploy- ment of the SRS side and curtain airbags could impact the child resulting in death or serious injury.

. To secure the child restraint sys- tem, be sure to comply with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufac- turer. Not doing so could result in death or serious injury to chil- dren in a sudden stop or acci- dent.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-29

1

(62,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Choosing a child restraint system

S01AG02

Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the childs age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United States or of CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufacturers statement of compli- ance in the document attached to the system. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compa- tible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

& Installing child restraint sys- tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

S01AG04

CAUTION

. When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufac- turers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child re- straint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.

. When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, set both seatbacks to the original position. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained, which may result in death or serious injuries in the event of sudden stop, sudden steering maneuver or an accident.

! Installing a rearward facing child restraint

S01AG0401

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- CING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an acci- dent, serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-30

(63,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

confirm that it is securely locked into place. Check that the red colored unlock- ing marker which is attached to the bottom of the lock release knob is not visible. For details, refer to Folding down the rear seatback F1-6.

2. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system in the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to Where to place a child restraint system F1-28.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system follow- ing the instructions provided by its manu- facturer. 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

5. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. If using the seatbelt in the ALRmode is recommended by the manufacturers in- structions supplied with the child restraint system, perform the following procedure. (1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. (2) Allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

7. Push and pull the child restraint system forward and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. 8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-31

1

(64,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

9. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing forward facing child re- straint

S01AG0402

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- CING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an acci- dent, serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to confirm that it is securely locked into place.

Check that the red colored unlock- ing marker which is attached to the bottom of the lock release knob is invisible. For details, refer to Folding down the rear seatback F1-6.

2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint where a child restraint system is intended to be installed in the following way.

When a child restraint system is installed on the window-side seating position or the rear center seating position of a sedan, remove the rear seat head restraint. For details, refer to Rear seats F1-9. Store the head restraint in the trunk (sedan) or cargo area (5-door models). Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

When a child restraint system is installed on the rear center seating position of a 5-door model, raise the rear seat head restraint to the ex- tended position. Do not remove the head restraint. For details, refer to Rear seats F1-9.

3. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child restraint system on the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system on the window-side seating

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-32

(65,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

position to be safe. For details, refer to Where to place a child restraint system F1-28.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system follow- ing the instructions provided by its manu- facturer.

When a child restraint system is installed on the rear center seating position of a 5-door model, pass the rear center seatbelt through the belt guide properly. For details, refer to Rear center seatbelt on 5-door mod- els F1-17.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

8. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. 9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-33

1

(66,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Sedan

5-door models

10. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located behind the rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to Top

tether anchorages F1-39.

11. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

If you have installed a child restraint system for the rear center seating posi- tion on a 5-door model, when you remove the child restraint system, the seatbelt may not be restored to the ELR mode even if the seatbelt is retracted. In this case, lower the head restraint to the retracted position to allow the seatbelt to retract moreover. The seatbelt will return to the ELR mode.

Remember that the head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position (retracted position). Therefore, when the rear center seat is occupied (including when a child restraint system is installed) next time, be sure to raise the head restraint to the extended position.

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat S01AG05

1. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-34

(67,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

booster seat. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the childs hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or redu- cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the childs hips. A high-positioned lap belt will in- crease the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sud- den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)

S01AG07

! Lower and tether anchorages S01AG0701

Sedan

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-35

1

(68,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

5-door models

WARNING

Attach the child restraint system to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Also, the seat belts should not be caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is se- curely attached. Otherwise it may cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or acci- dents.

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle

without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the designated anchorages provided on the vehicle body. The lower and tether an- chorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages (bars) and three upper an- chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- modating such child restraint systems.

! Lower anchorages S01AG070101

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system only on the rear seat window-side seating posi- tions. For each window-side seating posi- tion, two lower anchorages are provided. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-36

(69,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Tether anchorages S01AG070102

The tether anchorages (upper an- chorages) are provided at the locations shown in the above illustration. For details, refer to Top tether anchorages F1-39.

! To install a child restraint system using lower and tether an- chorages

S01AG070103

To install a child restraint system using lower and tether anchorages, perform the following procedure.

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to confirm that it is securely locked into place.

Check that the red colored unlock- ing marker which is attached to the bottom of the lock release knob is invisible. For details, refer to Folding down the rear seatback F1-6.

2. You will find marks at the bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of the lower an- chorages (bars).

Remove the covers and locate the lower anchorages (bars).

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-37

1

(70,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

3. Remove the rear seat head restraint. For details, refer to Rear seats F1-9.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the trunk (sedan) or the cargo area (5-door models). Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to pre- vent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

4. While following the instructions sup- plied by the child restraint system manu- facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

5. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attachment type (which uses tether belts to connect the child restraint system properly to the lower anchorages)] While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt. 6. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located on the rear shelf (sedan)/behind the rear seat (5-door models) and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to Top tether anchorages F1-39.

7. Before seating a child in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to verify that it is held securely in position. 8. To remove the child restraint system, follow the reverse procedures of installa- tion.

If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-38

(71,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Top tether anchorages S01AG09

Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as follows, while observing the instructions by the child restraint systemmanufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or avail- able.

! Anchorage location S01AG0901

Sedan 1) For left seat 2) For center seat 3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed on

the rear shelf behind the rear seat.

5-door models 1) For left seat 2) For center seat 3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed on the back side of the rear seatback.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-39

1

(72,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! To hook the top tether S01AG0902

CAUTION

. Except for the center seating position on 5-door models, re- move the head restraint when mounting a child restraint sys- tem. Otherwise, it might be pos- sible that the top tether cannot be fastened tightly.

. For the center seating position on 5-door models, raise the center head restraint to the extended position when mounting a child restraint system. Otherwise, it will be impossible to use the seatbelt guide that is attached to the head restraint correctly. The seatbelt guide is essential for routing the belt webbing at the center seating position. For in- formation about using the seat- belt guide, refer to Rear center seatbelt on 5-door models F1- 17.

Sedan

5-door models

1. Open the cover (sedan) and attach the top tether hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.

For the center seating position on 5- door models, route the top tether under the head restraint as illustrated below.

1) Seatbelt guide 2) Seatbelt of the center seating position 3) Top tether

2. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you have any question regarding the installa- tion of a child restraint system.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems1-40

(73,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

S01AH

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re- straint system. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehi- cles seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- mental restraint system in addition to a lap/ shoulder belt at each front seating position and each rear window-side seating posi- tions. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of seven airbags. The configurations are as follows. . Drivers and front passengers frontal airbags . Drivers and front passengers side airbags . Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas- senger, and window-side rear passen- gers) . Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protec- tion provided by the seatbelt. The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to Seatbelt preten- sioners F1-21.

& General precautions regard- ing SRS airbag system

S01AH10

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection pro- vided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seat- belts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best com- bined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag. For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to Seatbelts F1-12.

. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat- belt. They do not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important towear your seatbelt to

help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.

WARNING

. The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-41

1

(74,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The SRS side airbags are stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and they provide pro- tection by deploying rapidly (fas- ter than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact or frontal collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries if your head or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equipped with SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the front or rear door on either side. Also, do not put your head, arms or hands out of the window. The SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the cabin are stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact, roll- over or an offset frontal collision. However, the force of its deploy- ment may cause injuries if your head is too close to it.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed faster than the blink of an eye and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position such as one

thrown forward during pre-acci- dent braking. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms be- cause of the SRS airbag deploy- ment force.

WARNING

. Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. You could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-42

(75,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, these objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breath- ing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breath- ing trouble. If you or your pas- sengers have breathing pro- blems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

NOTE . When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with SRS airbags. Also, notify the buyer of the applicable sec- tion in this Owners Manual.

. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire caused by leaking fuel. For details about restarting of the engine, refer to If your vehicle is involved in an accident F9-21.

& General precautions regard- ing SRS airbag system for accessories and any objects

S01AH13

WARNING

. Do not put any objects (including straps or cords) over the steering wheel pad, column cover, or dashboard. These objects could be en-

tangled with the steering wheel, preventing the SRS frontal airbag, etc. from oper- ating properly.

If the SRS frontal airbag de- ploys, these objects could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43

1

(76,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Do not put any objects under the drivers side of the instrument panel. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could in- terfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to heavy, sharp or hard acces- sories, or another key. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those ob- jects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury. WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- ror over the inside rear viewmirror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those ob- jects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occu- pants.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of SRS side airbag deploy- ment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicles occupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro- phone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side win- dow, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A hands-free microphone or other

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-44

(77,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

accessory in such a location could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the curtain airbag, or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deploy- ment of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being thrown through the cabin or by preventing deployment of the cur-

tain airbags. Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no sharp objects in the pockets. Hang cloth- ing directly on the coat hooks with- out using hangers.

WARNING

. Do not put any kind of clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the front seat sur- face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent prop- er deployment of the SRS side airbag, reducing protection avail- able to the front seats occupant.

. Do not install a seat cover unless it is a genuine SUBARU seat cover exclusively designed for use with the SRS airbag. Even when using a genuine SUBARU seat cover, the SRS side airbag system may not function nor- mally if the seat cover is not installed correctly.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-45

1

(78,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& General precautions regard- ing SRS airbag system and children

S01AH14

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop- erly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deploy- ment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recom- mend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that

have outgrown child restraint de- vices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint sys- tem, refer to Child restraint sys- tems F1-26.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-46

(79,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passengers seat. The SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable force and can injure or even kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-47

1

(80,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

WARNING

. Never allow a child to do the following. Kneel on any passengers seat

facing the side window Wrap his/her arms around the

front seat seatback Put his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body out of the window

In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head, arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag and/ or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag, children should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-48

(81,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Components S01AH11

1) Drivers SRS frontal airbag 2) Front passengers SRS frontal airbag 3) SRS side airbag 4) SRS curtain airbag 5) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.

Drivers SRS frontal airbag: in the center portion of the steering wheel A SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the pad of the airbag.

Front passengers SRS frontal airbag: near the top of the dashboard under the SRS AIRBAG mark

SRS side airbag: in the door side of each front seat seatback which bears an SRS AIRBAG label

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass) SRS AIRBAG marks are located at the top of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: under the steering column A SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the door of the airbag.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-49

1

(82,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)

2) Frontal airbag module (drivers side) 3) Frontal airbag module (front passengers

side) 4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (drivers side) 7) Side airbag module (front passengers

side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side) 10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side) 12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (front passengers side) 13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side) 14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side) 15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) 16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) 17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passengers

side) 18) Knee airbag module (drivers side) 19) Front passengers occupant detection

system sensor 20) Front passengers occupant detection

control module 21) Front passengers frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator 22) SRS airbag system warning light 23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat) 24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side) 25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand

side) 26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passengers

side)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-50

(83,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system

S01AH02 Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system that com- plies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the de- ployment force of the drivers SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the drivers and front passengers sun visors beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag at- tached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase Even with Advanced Air Bags. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag. Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system. For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer to Components F1-49.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy. . SRS frontal airbag for driver . SRS frontal airbag for front passenger . SRS knee airbag for driver . SRS curtain airbag*1

*1:When an offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat- belts by reducing the impact to the occupants head, chest and knees.

! Drivers SRS frontal airbag S01AH0201

The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

SRS airbag system warning light Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.

NOTE The drivers SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- tem.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-51

1

(84,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Front passengers SRS frontal air- bag

S01AH0202 The front passengers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and pos- ture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection sys- tem determines whether the front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag should be de- ployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passengers SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passengers seatbelt pretensioner oper- ates with the drivers seatbelt preten- sioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to Seatbelt preten- sioners F1-21.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail. . Do not apply any strong impact to

the front passengers seat such as by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seat- back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front passengers seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble the front passengers seat.

. Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU acces- sory under the front passengers

seat. . Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the front passengers seat.

. Do not place any objects (books, etc.) around the front passen- gers seat.

. Do not use the front passengers seat with the head restraint re- moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the front passengers seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle en- gaged when you leave your vehi- cle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat uphols- tery.

. Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their forward-backward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to Forward and backward adjustmentF1-5 and Reclining the seatback F1-5.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-52

(85,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

SRS airbag system warning light If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passengers occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warn- ing light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme- diately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passengers seat while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE The front passengers SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not con- trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron- tal airbag system.

! Passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators

S01AH0203

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

Refer to Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators F3-15.

! Occupant detection system S01AH0209

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and pos- ture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection sys- tem determines whether the front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag should be de- ployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other- wise, the SRS airbag system warn- ing light may illuminate to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant detection system. In this

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-53

1

(86,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

case, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Electronic devices* may affect the occupant detection system, espe- cially under either of the following conditions. . when placed on the front passen-

gers seat while connected to the accessory power outlet

. when used by the front passen- ger

*Example: cell phones, laptops, por- table music players, or electronic games

If either of the following situations occurs when using an electronic device in the vehicle, at first try to relocate that device to avoid it creating any interference. . The SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates. . The front passengers frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators oper- ate erratically.

If the interference remains, stop using the device in the vehicle.

SRS airbag system warning light If the front passengers seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat dry naturally and then check the SRS airbag system warning light.

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

If the front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators do not work properly even when the front passengers seat is dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passengers seat and have the occupant detection system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-54

(87,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passengers seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from work- ing properly. Check that the indicators work properly. When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passen- gers frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passengers seat.

! Conditions in which front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag is not activated

S01AH0204 The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passengers seat: . The seat is empty. . The seat is equipped with an appro- priate child restraint system and an infant or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN- ING that follows.) . The front passengers occupant detec- tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGERS SRS FRON- TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward fa- cing child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint systembe also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passen- gers seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passengers

SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for chil- dren.

CAUTION

When the front passengers seat is occupied by an infant in an appro- priate child restraint system, ob- serve the following precautions. Failure to do so may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant detection system, activating the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by the infant in the child restraint system. . Do not place any article (includ-

ing electronic devices) on the seat other than the infant in the child restraint system.

. Do not placemore than one infant in the child restraint system.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-55

1

(88,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! If the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint sys- tem (including booster seat)

S01AH020401

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 2. Remove the child restraint system from the seat. 3. By referring to the child restraint manufacturers recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedures in Child restraint systems F1-26, correctly install the child restraint

system. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and make sure that the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant. . Ensure that the backward-forward po- sition and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking relevant corrective actions de- scribed above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passengers seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupants seating posture. Children should always wear a seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre- spective of whether the airbag is deac- tivated or activated. If the front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off), take the following action. . Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi- nated while the OFF indicator turns off despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/ small adult in the rear seat and imme- diately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-56

(89,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Conditions in which front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag is activated

S01AH0205 The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following condi- tions are met regarding the front passen- gers seat. . When the seat is occupied by an adult. . When certain items (e.g. jug of water) are placed on the seat.

! If the passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passengers seat is occupied by an adult

S01AH020501

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passengers seat. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 2. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while theON indicator remains off, take the following actions. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 2. Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat cover, seat heater or massager, etc. 3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passengers seat, or should sit in a rear seat. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi- nated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-57

1

(90,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Operation S01AH0207

A) Drivers side B) Passengers side 1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. 2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag de- pending on the characteristic of item(s) or person on the front passengers seat monitored by the front passengers occu- pant detection system sensor. For this reason, only the drivers SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predeter- mined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only drivers module or both drivers and front passen- gersmodules) instructing themodule(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). . the front sub sensors . the impact sensors in the airbag control module

On the drivers side, the SRS knee airbag also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-58

(91,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simulta- neously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the drivers SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of item(s) or person on the seat in the case of the front passengers SRS frontal air- bag. ! After deployment

S01AH0210 After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- diately starts to deflate so that the drivers vision is not obstructed and the drivers ability to maintain control of the vehicle is not impaired. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys and the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy, the drivers and front passengers seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident S01AH0211

The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS frontal airbag are de- signed as follows. . to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision . to function on a one-time-only basis

The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS frontal airbag are not designed as follows. . to deploy in most lesser frontal im- pacts*1

. to deploy inmost side or rear impacts or in most rollover accidents*2

*1: Because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. *2: Because deployment of only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both the drivers and front

passengers SRS frontal airbags would not protect the occupant in those situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passen- ger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of accident in which the drivers/drivers and front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy

S01AH021101

A head-on collision against a thick con- crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-59

1

(92,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.

! Examples of the types of acci- dents in which it is possible that the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy

S01AH021102

Only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercar- riage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-60

(93,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the drivers/ drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

S01AH021103

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision.

5) The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the dri- vers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend- ing on the level of accident forces involved.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-61

1

(94,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the drivers/dri- vers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) are not de- signed to deploy in most cases

S01AH021104

The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags are not designed to deploy in most of the following cases. . If the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind . If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof . If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed frontal collision

1) First impact 2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the drivers and/or front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession, once either or both of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags is/are activated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the second impact. & SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag S01AH03

! SRS side airbag S01AH0302

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an SRS AIRBAG label.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants chest and

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-62

(95,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants. ! SRS curtain airbag

S01AH0303 Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU SRS curtain airbag system that complies with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226. The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the top of each center pillar. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side win- dow and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants head. In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supple- ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupants head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side win- dow and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupants head and chest.

! Operation S01AH0301

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The following airbags deploy indepen- dently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. . Drivers SRS side airbag . Front passengers SRS side airbag . SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side) . SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen- dently of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impact force, is located in each of the following locations. . In the left and right front doors . In the left and right center pillars . In the left and right rear wheel houses . Under the rear center seat

A rollover sensor is also located inside the airbag control module.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-63

1

(96,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! In cases of rollover accident or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously S01AH0306

Impact sensors affected SRS side airbags SRS curtain airbags Seatbelt pretensioner

(shoulder belt pretensioner only)

Impacted side Non-impacted side Impacted side Non-impacted

side Impacted side Non-impacted side

Both of the sen- sors together sense an impact force

Impact sensor in front doors

* * * Impact sensor under rear cen- ter seat

Both of the sen- sors together sense an impact force

Impact sensor in center pillars

* * Impact sensor under rear cen- ter seat

Both of the sen- sors together sense an impact force

Impact sensor in rear wheel houses

* Impact sensor under rear cen- ter seat

Rollover sensor in airbag control module * * * *

*: Activated : Not activated

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-64

(97,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! After deployment S01AH0304

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occur- rences are a normal result of the deploy- ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the compo- nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag sys- tem (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident S01AH0305

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed as follows: . to deploy in the event of an accident involving amoderate to severe side impact collision . to function on a one-time-only basis.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in the following cases: . in most lesser side impact . in most frontal or most rear impacts (because the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not pro- tect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also de- signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart- ment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy.

S01AH030501

1) A severe side impact near the front seat.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-65

1

(98,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy.

S01AH030502

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof. 3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicles tires hit a curbstone laterally.

4) An offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-66

(99,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.

S01AH030503

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole 3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustra- tion.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-67

1

(100,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Examples of the types of accidents inwhich the SRSside airbag is unlikely to deploy.

S01AH030504

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side- on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of acci- dents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-68

(101,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Examplesof the typesof accidents inwhich theSRScurtain airbag isunlikely to deploy.

S01AH030505

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side- on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of acci- dents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-69

1

(102,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Examples of the types of acci- dents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases

S01AH030506

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station- ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind. 3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases.

1) First impact 2) Second impact A) SRS curtain airbag B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors S01AH04

SRS airbag system warning light A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including front seatbelt pretensioners) with the ignition switch in the ON position. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by illumi- nating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-70

(103,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The following components are monitored by the indicator: . Front sub sensor . Airbag control module (including im- pact sensor and rollover sensor) . Frontal airbag module

Drivers side Front passengers side

. Knee airbag module (drivers side)

. Side airbag sensor

. Front door impact sensor

. Side airbag module

. Curtain airbag sensor

. Curtain airbag module

. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear center seat) . Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side) . Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (front passengers side) . Lap belt pretensioner (front passen- gers side) . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- gers side) . Front passengers occupant detection system sensor . Front passengers occupant detection control module . Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator . All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. . Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light . No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position

. Continuous illumination of the warning light

. Illumination of the warning light while driving

Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury.

& SRS airbag system servicing S01AH05

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod- ule or scrapping the entire vehi- cle damaged by a collision, con- sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user- serviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- ing with or disconnecting the systems wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas indicated in the following list, have the work performed by an author- ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- bag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas.

CONTINUED

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-71

1

(104,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Under the center of the instru- ment panel

. On both the right and left sides at the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column and nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front passengers side and nearby areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an author- ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- nents of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

NOTE In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags did not deploy. . The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passengers SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged. . The center pillar, front door, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these parts, was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy. . The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged. . The rear part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which no SRS airbag was deployed.

& Precautions against vehicle modification

S01AH06

WARNING

To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifica- tions. . Installation of custom steering

wheels . Attachment of additional trimma-

terials to the dashboard . Installation of custom seats . Replacement of seat fabric or

leather . Installation of additional fabric or

leather on the front seat . Attachment of a hands-free mi-

crophone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)1-72

(105,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Installation of additional electri- cal/electronic equipment such as amobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system compo- nents and/or wiring is not advi- sable. This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS air- bag system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system. . Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.

. Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers door pillar or specified for indivi- dual vehicle models in this Own- ers Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts on your vehicle.

& How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may af- fect the advanced airbag system

S01AH15 Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors.

Subaru of America, Inc. Customer Retailer Services Department P.O. Box 6000 Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu, HI 96819-4467 808-839-2273

Shens Corporation dba Prestige Automo- bile 491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1 Dededo, Guam 96921-6225 671-633-2698

Trebol Motors P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00910 787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc. Consumer Support Department 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4J7 1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distribu- tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the SUBARU distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-73

1

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6 Left Page

(109,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S02 Keys ......................................................................... 2-3

Key number plate................................................... 2-3 Keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped) ......................................................... 2-3 Safety precautions ................................................. 2-4 Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob....................................................................... 2-8

Unlock using PIN Code Access .............................2-12 Power saving function ..........................................2-14 Power saving function of access key fob ..............2-14 Disabling keyless access function.........................2-14 Selecting audible signal operation.........................2-16 Warning chimes and warning indicator..................2-16 When access key fob does not operate properly ...2-16 Replacing battery of access key fob......................2-16 Replacing access key fob .....................................2-16 Certification for keyless access with push-button start system........................................................2-17

Immobilizer ............................................................ 2-18 Security indicator light ..........................................2-18 Key replacement ...................................................2-18 Certification for immobilizer system ......................2-18

Remote keyless entry system.............................. 2-20 Locking the doors.................................................2-21 Unlocking the doors..............................................2-21 Opening the trunk lid (sedan) ................................2-21 Unlocking the rear gate (5-door models)................2-21 Vehicle finder function ..........................................2-22 Sounding a panic alarm ........................................2-22

Selecting audible signal operation (models without keyless access with push-button start system)............................................................ 2-22

Replacing the battery............................................ 2-22 Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-22 Certification for remote keyless entry system........ 2-23

Door locks............................................................. 2-24 Locking and unlocking from the outside ............... 2-24 Locking and unlocking from the inside ................. 2-25 Key lock-in prevention function ............................ 2-26 Battery drainage prevention function .................... 2-26

Alarm system........................................................ 2-27 Alarm system operation........................................ 2-27 Arming the system ............................................... 2-28 Disarming the system........................................... 2-29 Alarm system setting............................................ 2-29 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system .............................................................. 2-30

Valet mode ........................................................... 2-30 Child safety locks................................................. 2-30 Windows................................................................ 2-31

Power window operation....................................... 2-31 Initialization of power window with one-touch auto up/down function ....................................... 2-33

Trunk lid (sedan)................................................... 2-33 To open and close the trunk lid from outside ........ 2-34 To open the trunk lid from inside .......................... 2-34 Internal trunk lid release handle............................ 2-34

Keys and doors

2

(110,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Rear gate (5-door models) ................................... 2-36 Lock/unlock ..........................................................2-36 Open/close ...........................................................2-36

Moonroof (if equipped)......................................... 2-37 Moonroof switches ............................................... 2-38 Sun shade ............................................................ 2-39

Keys and doors

(111,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Keys S02AA

NOTE For models with keyless access with push-button start system, refer to Keyless access with push-button start system F2-3. The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

1) Master key (Main) 2) Master key (Sub) 3) Sub key 4) Key number plate

A key can be used in the following locations. . Ignition switch . Drivers door

. Glove box

NOTE Locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be con- trolled with the buttons on the key. For detailed information, refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-20.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position, thereby stopping the engine.

& Key number plate S02AA01

The key number is stamped on the key number plate attached to the key set.Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle. Refer to Key replacement F2- 18.

Keyless access with push- button start system (if equipped)

S02AP

The following access key fobs are pro- vided with the vehicle.

1) Access key fob (main) 2) Access key fob (sub) 3) Key number plate

The keyless access with push-button start system allows you to perform the following functions when you are carrying the access key fob. . Locking and unlocking of the doors and rear gate (5-door models). Refer to Lock- ing and unlocking by holding the access key fob F2-8.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Keys 2-3

2

(112,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Opening the trunk (sedan). Refer to Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob F2-8. . Starting and stopping the engine. For detailed information, refer to Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) F7-12. . Arming and disarming the alarm sys- tem. For detailed information, refer to Alarm system F2-27.

NOTE . Locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be con- trolled with the buttons on the access key fob. For detailed information, refer to Remote keyless entry system F2- 20. . Carefully store the key number plate supplied with the access key fob. It is necessary for vehicle repair and addi- tional registration of access key fobs. For details, refer to Key replacement F2-18. An emergency key is attached to each access key fob.

1) Release button 2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency key. The emergency key is used for the follow- ing operations. . Locking and unlocking the drivers door . Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTE The glove box can be kept locked when you leave your vehicle and the access key fob (with the emergency key re- moved) at a parking facility.

& Safety precautions S02AP11

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, stay at least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the transmitting antennas installed on the vehicle. The radio waves from the transmit- ting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of implanted pacemakers and im- planted defibrillators. If youwear electronicmedical equip- ment other than an implanted pace- maker or an implanted defibrillator, before using the keyless access with push-button start system, refer to Radio waves used for the key- less access with push-button start system mentioned later, and con- tact the electronic medical equip- ment manufacturer for more infor- mation. The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the electronic medical equipment.

Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start sys- tem

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system2-4

(113,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. The keyless access with push- button start system uses radio waves of the following fre- quency* in addition to the radio waves used for the remote key- less entry system. The radio waves are periodically output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown in the following illustrations. * Radio frequency: 134 kHz

Sedan 1) Antenna

5-door models 1) Antenna

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-5

2

(114,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access key fob inside the vehicle or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The access key fob may be locked inside the vehicle, or the battery may discharge rapidly. Note that the push-button ignition switch may not turn on in some cases depending on the location of the access key fob.

. The access key fob contains electronic components. Observe the following precautions to pre- vent malfunctions. It is recommended to have the

access key battery replaced at an authorized SUBARU dealer to avoid the risk of damage.

Do not get the access key fob wet. If the access key fob gets wet, wipe it off immediately and let it dry completely.

Donot apply strong impacts to the access key fob.

Never leave the access key fob in direct sunlight or any- where that may become hot, such as on the dashboard. It

may damage the battery or cause circuit malfunctions.

Do not wash the access key fob in an ultrasonic washer.

Do not leave the access key fob in humid or dusty loca- tions. Doing so may cause malfunctions.

Keep the access key fob away from magnetic sources.

Do not leave the access key fob near a personal computer or home electrical appliance.

Do not leave the access key fob near a battery charger or any electrical accessories.

Do not apply metallic window tint or attach metallic objects to the windows.

Do not fit non genuine acces- sories or parts.

. If the access key fob is dropped, the integrated emergency key in- side may become loose. Be care- ful not to lose the emergency key.

. When traveling in an airplane, do not press the button of the ac- cess key fob. If any button of the access key fob is pressed, radio waves are emitted andmay affect

the operation of the airplane. When carrying the access key fob in a bag, take measures to prevent the buttons from being pressed accidentally.

NOTE . The operational/non-operational setting for the keyless access function can be changed. For the setting proce- dure, refer to Disabling keyless ac- cess function F2-14. . For detailed information about the operation method for the push-button ignition switch while the keyless ac- cess function is switched to the non- operational mode, refer to Access key fob if access key fob does not operate properly F9-18. . The keyless access with push-but- ton start system uses weak radio waves. The status of the access key fob and environmental conditions may interfere with the communication be- tween the access key fob and the vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine.

When operating near a facility where strong radio waves are trans- mitted, such as a broadcast station

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system2-6

(115,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

and power transmission lines When products that transmit radio waves are used, such as an access key fob or a remote trans- mitter key of another vehicle When carrying the access key fob of your vehicle together with the access key fob or the remote trans- mitter of another vehicle When the access key fob is placed near wireless communica- tion equipment such as a cell phone When the access key fob is placed near a metallic object When metallic accessories are attached to the access key fob When carrying the access key fob with electronic appliances such as a laptop computer When the battery of the access key fob is discharged

. The access key fob is always com- municating with the vehicle and is continuously using the battery. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery becomes fully discharged, re- place it with a new one. . If an access key fob is lost, it is recommended that all of the remaining access key fobs be reregistered. For

reregistration of an access key fob, contact a SUBARU dealer. . For a spare access key fob, contact a SUBARU dealer. . Up to 7 access key fobs can be registered for one vehicle. . Do not leave the access key fob in the storage spaces inside the vehicle, such as the door pocket, dashboard, inside the trunk and the corner of the cargo area. Vibrations may damage the key fob or turn on the switch, possibly resulting in a lockout. . After the vehicle battery is dis- charged or replaced, initialization of the steering lock system may be re- quired to start the engine. In this case, perform the following procedure to initialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition switch to the OFF position. For details, refer to Switching power status F3-7. (2) Open and close the drivers door. (3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- onds.

When the steering is locked, the initi- alization is completed. . Do not leave the access key fob in the following places.

On the instrument panel On the floor Inside the glove box Inside the door trim pocket On the rear seat On the rear shelf (sedan) Inside the trunk (sedan) In the cargo area (5-door models)

If you do, the following situations may occur. The access key fob is mistakenly locked inside the vehicle. A false warning issues although no malfunction actually occurs. No warning issues even when any malfunction occurs.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-7

2

(116,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob

S02AP20 When the access key fob is carried within the operating range, the doors and the rear gate (5-door models) can be locked/ unlocked just by touching the door handle.

NOTE The vehicle can also be locked/un- locked with the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-20.

! Operating ranges S02AP2001

Sedan 1) Antenna 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32

in (40 to 80 cm))

5-door models 1) Antenna 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32

in (40 to 80 cm))

1) LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either of

the operating ranges of the front doors, the LED indicator on the access key fob flashes. When the keyless access func- tions are disabled, the LED indicator does not flash unless a button on the access key fob is pressed.

NOTE . If the access key fob is placed too close to the vehicle body, the keyless access functions may not operate properly. If they do not operate prop- erly, repeat the operation from further away. . If the access key fob is placed near the ground or in an elevated location from the ground, even if it is in the indicated operating range, the keyless access function may not operate prop- erly. . When the access key fob is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who is not carrying the access key fob, to operate the keyless access function. Note that the keyless access function can be operated only by the door handle, door lock sensor, rear gate opener button, trunk opener button or rear lock button in the operating range in which the access key fob is detected.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system2-8

(117,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. It is not possible to lock the doors and rear gate using the keyless access function when the access key fob is inside the vehicle. However, depending on the status of the access key fob and the environmental conditions, the ac- cess key fob may be locked inside the vehicle. Before locking the vehicle, make sure that you have the access key fob. . When the battery of the access key fob is discharged, or when operating it in a location with strong radio waves or noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power plant, broadcast station or an area where wireless equipment is used), or while talking on a cell phone, the operating ranges may be reduced, or the keyless access function may not operate. In such a case, perform the procedure described in Locking and unlocking F9-19. . The doors may lock or unlock when the car is being washed or exposed to a significant amount of water that con- tacts the door handle while the key fob is still in the operating range.

! How to lock and unlock S02AP2002

It is possible to perform the following operations when you are carrying the access key fob.

. Lock and unlock the doors

. Unlock the trunk lid (sedan)

. Unlock and lock rear gate (5-door models)

NOTE . The trunk can be opened without the access key fob if all doors are un- locked. When you begin driving the vehicle, the trunk lid will lock automa- tically. . It is not possible to lock the doors and rear gate using the keyless access function when the push-button ignition switch is in the ACCor ON position. Refer to Switching power status F3- 7. . If the door handle is gripped with a gloved hand, the door lock may not be released. . If the door lock sensor is touched three times or more repeatedly, the system will ignore the sensor opera- tion. . When performing the locking proce- dure too quickly, locking may not have been completed. After performing the locking procedure, it is recommended to pull the REARdoor handle to confirm that the doors have been locked. . If any of the doors (or the rear gate/ trunk lid) are not fully closed, the

following will occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.

an electronic chirp sounds five times. the hazard warning flashers flash five times.

. It is possible to lock the doors even when one of the doors is open. After performing the locking procedure, close the opened door or rear gate (5- door models) to lock it. . Within 3 seconds after locking the doors and the rear gate by using the keyless access function, it is not pos- sible to unlock doors and/or the rear gate (5-door models) by using the key- less access function. . When locking, be sure to carry the access key fob to prevent locking the access key fob in the vehicle. . The setting of the hazard warning flasher operation and the volume of the audible signal can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with the combination meter display (color LCD), the setting of the hazard warning flasher operation can be changed by operating the combination meter dis- play (color LCD). For details, refer to Keyless Entry System F3-40.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-9

2

(118,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Lockingwith thedoor locksensor S02AP200201

1) Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all doors including the rear gate (5-door models), and touch the door lock sensor on the door handle. All doors including the rear gate will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

! Locking with the rear lock button (5-door models)

S02AP200202

1) Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all doors including the rear gate and press the rear lock button. The rear gate and all doors will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

! Unlocking S02AP200203

Carry the access key fob, and grip the following door handle. . The drivers door handle: Either only the drivers door will unlock, or all doors will unlock. . The front passengers door handle: All doors and rear gate (5-doormodels) will be unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system2-10

(119,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Opening rear gate (5-door mod- els)

S02AP200204

1) Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the rear gate opener button. Either only the rear gate will unlock, or all doors will unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

! Opening trunk (sedan) S02AP200205

1) Trunk opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the trunk opener button. The trunk will open. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

NOTE Under the following conditions, the trunk can be opened without the key fob. . the trunk lock/unlock setting is set to on . all doors are unlocked

The trunk lock/unlock setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.

! Door unlock selection function S02AP2003

When the door is unlocked using the keyless access function, only the doors that were set can be unlocked. The settings can be changed with the following methods. . The setting can be changed by operat- ing the combination meter display (color LCD) (if equipped). Refer to Keyless Entry System F3-40. . The setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-11

2

(120,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Unlock using PIN Code Ac- cess

S02AP21 When all doors including the rear gate (5- door models) are locked, you can unlock the doors (including rear gate) without a key by performing the following procedure. . Sedan: press the trunk opener button . 5-door models: press the rear lock button

1) Trunk opener button (sedan)

1) Rear lock button (5-door models)

NOTE PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key fob is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is recommended that a 5- digit security code (PIN code) be regis- tered.

! Preparation for registering a PIN code

S02AP2101 1. Turn off the ignition switch. 2. Close all doors (including trunk/rear gate). 3. Press and hold the button on the access key fob. Then all doors (including rear gate) will be locked. 4. Keep the button pressed, and press the trunk opener button (sedan)/rear

lock button (5-door models) within 5 seconds after step 3. 5. Press and hold the trunk opener button (sedan)/rear lock button (5-door models) for more than 5 seconds. Confirm a chirp sound. 6. Release the button and trunk opener button (sedan)/rear lock button (5-door models). 7. Press the button on the access key fob while the chirp sounds. Then the chirp will stop and the prepara- tion is complete.

NOTE Press the button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

! Registration for a PIN code S02AP2102

For example, to register 32468 as the PIN code, perform the following proce- dure. 1. Press the trunk opener button (sedan)/ rear lock button (5-door models) three times. 2. After a chirp sounds once, press the trunk opener button (sedan)/rear lock

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system2-12

(121,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

button (5-door models) twice. 3. After a chirp sounds once, press the trunk opener button (sedan)/rear lock button (5-door models) four times. 4. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press the trunk opener button (sedan)/rear lock button (5-door models) six times. 5. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press the trunk opener button (sedan)/rear lock button (5-door models) eight times. 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts sounding intermittently. 7. All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.

NOTE . Press the trunk opener button (se- dan)/rear lock button (5-door models) ten times to enter 0. . Change the PIN code frequently to protect your vehicle from theft. . If you have lent your vehicle to another person, confirm that the PIN code has not been changed or deleted. If the PIN code has been changed or deleted, reregister a new PIN code. . If you make an error during the registration procedure, press the or button on the access key fob. Then, start over from the procedure

described in Preparation for register- ing a PIN code. . To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register a string of the same five numbers together, such as 00000, nor 12345 as a PIN code. . Do not register your vehicle license plate number or simple numbers such as 11122 or 12121 as a PIN code. Doing so will increase the risk of vehicle theft. . When you try to register 22222, the registered PIN code will be deleted. You cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access until a new code is registered. . After registering a new PIN code, make sure that you can unlock the doors using the PIN code. . The PIN code cannot be deleted while the keyless access function is disabled by operating the access key fob. . Reregister the PIN code in the fol- lowing case.

when you forget the PIN code when you want to change the PIN code

! Unlocking S02AP2103

Perform steps 1 to 5 described in Regis- tration for a PIN code.

NOTE . You cannot unlock by PIN Code Access in the following cases.

when the access key fob is within the operating ranges when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position

. If you make an operation error dur- ing the unlocking procedure, start over with the unlocking procedure after waiting for 5 seconds or longer. . To protect your vehicle from theft, a buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes are entered five times continuously. If this occurs, you cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access for 5 minutes.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-13

2

(122,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Power saving function S02AP23

The keyless access function will be dis- abled in the following cases to protect the access key fob battery and the vehicle battery. . Case 1: When the keyless access function and the remote keyless entry system have not been used for 2 weeks or longer while all doors are locked

Operate one of the following items to recover the keyless access function:

Unlock the doors by operating any procedure other than gripping the front passengers door handle Lock the doors Open a door and then close it

. Case 2: When the access key fob has been left in the operating range for 10 minutes or longer while all doors are locked

Operate one of the following items to recover the keyless access function:

Unlock the doors by gripping the door handle Unlock the doors by pressing the rear gate opener button Lock the doors by touching the door lock sensor Lock or unlock the doors by using

the remote keyless entry system Lock or unlock the doors by using the power door locking switch Open either of the front doors

& Power saving function of ac- cess key fob

S02AP22 This function stops the access key fob from receiving signals and helps minimize the battery consumption of the access key fob. 1. Press the button twice while hold- ing the button.

1) LED indicator

2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4 times to notify that the setting is complete. When the access key fob is in the power save mode, the keyless access function

and push-button start system will not be available. To cancel the power savemode, press one of the buttons on the access key fob.

& Disabling keyless access function

S02AP07

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, per- form the procedure described in By operating the drivers door F2-15 to disable the keyless access function. If you perform the proce- dure described in By operating the access key fob F2-15, the opera- tion of an implanted pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be af- fected by the radio waves from the transmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used for a long time, or when you choose not to use the keyless access function, the key- less access function can be disabled.

NOTE . The locking and unlocking function by the remote keyless entry system is not disabled.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system2-14

(123,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. To start the engine while the func- tions are disabled, perform the proce- dure described in Starting engine F9-19.

! Disabling functions S02AP0701

! By operating the access key fob S02AP070102

If you have registered a PIN code for PIN Code Access, you can disable the keyless access function by operating the access key fob. For details about registering a PIN code, refer to Preparation for registering a PIN code F2-12. 1. Open the drivers door. 2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock position.

3. Press and hold the button and button on the access key fob simulta-

neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the function will be disabled.

! By operating the drivers door S02AP070101

1. Sit in the drivers seat, and close the door (5door models).

2. Push the unlock side of the power door locking switch. 3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is performed, open the drivers door. 4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is performed, push the unlock side of the power door locking switch twice while the door is open. 5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is performed, close and open the drivers door twice.

6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is performed, push the unlock side of the power door locking switch twice while the door is open. 7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is performed, close and open the drivers door once. 8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is performed, close the door.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch slowly. If the switch is pressed quickly, the functions may not be disabled.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-15

2

(124,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Enabling functions S02AP0702

When the procedure to disable the func- tions is performed again, a chirp sound will be heard, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE . The keyless access function will be enabled only if you perform the proce- dure in the same manner you disabled the function (for example, when dis- abling by operating the drivers door, the function will not be enabled even if you operate the access key fob). . Press the push-button ignition switch if you do not know the proce- dure in which the keyless access func- tion was disabled.

When disabling by operating the drivers door: a chirp will not be heard When disabling by operating the access key fob: a chirp will be heard

& Selecting audible signal op- eration

S02AP12 Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE For models with the combination meter display (color LCD), the setting can be changed by operating the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to Vehicle Setting F3-40.

& Warning chimes and warning indicator

S02AP06 The warning chime and the access key warning light serve the following purposes: . To minimize improper operation of the keyless access with push-button start system. . To protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system F3-25.

& When access key fob does not operate properly

S02AP08 Refer to Access key fob if access key fob does not operate properly F9-18.

& Replacing battery of access key fob

S02AP09 Refer to Replacing battery of access key fob F11-48.

& Replacing access key fob S02AP13

Access key fobs can be replaced at SUBARU dealers. For more details, con- tact a SUBARU dealer.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system2-16

(125,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Certification for keyless ac- cess with push-button start system

S02AP14 . U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AHK FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1 FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de- vice may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models . Mexico-spec. models

IFT RLVDE1415-1661 14AHK DENSO

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-17

2

(126,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Immobilizer S02AB

The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicles immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. If engine start is attempted with an unregistered access key fob or key, the engine will not start. Even if the engine does start, it will stop after a few seconds. This system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran- tee.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct sunlight or anywhere it may be- come hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.

. Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the sys- tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE . To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the follow- ing security precautions:

Never leave your vehicle unat- tended with its keys inside. Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and the moon- roof, and lock the doors, trunk (sedan) and rear gate (5-door mod- els). Do not leave spare keys or any record of your key number in the vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

& Security indicator light S02AB02

Refer to Security indicator light F3-30.

& Key replacement S02AB03

Your key number plate will be required if you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicles immobilizer system before it can be used. The maximum number of keys that can be registered for use with one vehicle is as follows. . Four (models without keyless access with push-button start system)

. Seven (models with keyless access with push-button start system)

One key that has already been registered is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE If you lose a key, the lost keys ID code still remains in the memory of the vehicles immobilizer system. For se- curity reasons, the lost keys ID code should be erased from the memory. To erase the lost keys ID code, all keys that will be used are required. For details about new key registration and erasing the lost keys ID code, contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for immobilizer system

S02AB05 . For models with keyless access with push-button start system: Refer to Certification for keyless access with push-button start system F2-17.

. For models without keyless access with push-button start system:

U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2

Keys and doors/Immobilizer2-18

(127,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de- vice may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Canada-spec. models Mexico-spec. models

Keys and doors/Immobilizer 2-19

2

(128,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Remote keyless entry system S02AQ

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans- mitter to severe shocks, such as those experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit- ter apart except when replacing the battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.

. When traveling in an airplane, do not press the button of the re- mote transmitter. If any button of the remote transmit ter is pressed, radio waves are emitted and may affect the operation of the airplane. When carrying the remote transmitter in a bag, take measures to prevent the buttons from being pressed accidentally.

Access key fob 1) Lock/arm button 2) Unlock/disarm button 3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button 4) PANIC button

Transmitter 1) Lock/arm button 2) Unlock/disarm button 3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button 4) PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the following functions. . Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate for 5-door models) . Unlocking the trunk lid (sedan) or rear gate (5-door models) . Sounding a panic alarm . Arming and disarming the alarm sys- tem. For detailed information, refer to Alarm system F2-27.

The operable distance of the remote key- less entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this distance will

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system2-20

(129,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

vary depending on environmental condi- tions. The systems operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home electronic appliances.

NOTE . For models with keyless access with push-button start system, the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in any position other than the OFF position. . For models without keyless access with push-button start system, the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. . The hazard warning flashers will flash once or twice when the access key fob/transmitter button is pressed in the following cases.

When locking the doors When unlocking the doors When opening the trunk lid (se- dan) When unlocking the rear gate (5- door models)

. Operation of the hazard warning flashers in the above cases can be set

to On or Off by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for de- tails. . The setting of the remote trunk lid opener function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. (sedan)

& Locking the doors S02AQ01

Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors and rear gate (5-door models). An electro- nic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not fully closed, the following will occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed. . an electronic chirp sounds five times. . the hazard warning flashers flash five times.

When you close the door, it will automati- cally lock and then the following will occur. . an electronic chirp sounds once. . the hazard warning flashers flash once.

& Unlocking the doors S02AQ02

Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock the drivers door. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors and the rear gate (5-door models), briefly press the unlock/disarm button a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE If the interval between the first and second presses of the unlock/disarm button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.

& Opening the trunk lid (sedan)

S02AQ04 Press and hold the trunk lid opener button to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

& Unlocking the rear gate (5-door models)

S02AQ05 Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock the rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-21

2

(130,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Vehicle finder function S02AQ07

Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the lock/arm button three times in a 5-second period will cause your vehicles horn to sound once and its hazard warning flashers to flash three times.

NOTE If the interval between presses is too short when you press the lock/arm button three times, the system may not respond to the signals from the remote transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm S02AQ08

To activate the alarm, press the PANIC button once. The horn will sound and the hazard warning flashers will flash. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any button on the remote transmitter. Unless a button on the remote transmitter is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.

& Selecting audible signal op- eration (models without keyless access with push- button start system)

S02AQ09 Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off.

Perform the following steps to deactivate the audible signal. You can also use the same steps to restore the function. 1. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors and the rear gate (5-door models).

2. Hold down the unlock side of the power door locking switch. 3. While holding down the unlock side of the power door locking switch, pull the key out and reinsert it into the ignition switch at

least 6 times within 10 seconds after Step 2. 4. Open and close the drivers door once within 10 seconds after Step 3. 5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times to indicate completion of the setting.

Your SUBARU dealer can perform the above procedure for you. Also, for models with a combination meter display (color LCD), the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to Vehicle Setting F3-40.

& Replacing the battery S02AQ12

Refer to Replacing key battery F11-47.

& Replacing lost transmitters S02AQ13

If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), your transmit- ters should be reprogrammed for security reasons. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters programmed into the remote keyless entry system.

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system2-22

(131,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Certification for remote key- less entry system

S02AQ18

! U.S.-spec. models S02AQ1801

FCC ID: CWTB1G077 FCC ID: CWTD1G049

CAUTION

FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de- vice may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

! Canada-spec. models S02AQ1802

! Mexico-spec. models S02AQ1803

IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814 SUBARU MODEL: TB1G077

IFETEL RLVSUTD15-1815 SUBARU MODEL: TD1G049

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-23

2

(132,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Door locks S02AC

& Locking and unlocking from the outside

S02AC01 NOTE If you unlock the drivers door with a key (including an emergency key) and open the door while the alarm system is armed, the alarm system is triggered and the vehicles horn sounds. In this case, perform any of the following operations:

. Models with keyless access with push-button start system:

Press any button on the access key fob (except when the access key fob battery is discharged). Press the push-button ignition switch to ACC. Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following pro- cedures.

Grip the front door handle Press the rear gate opener button

. Models without keyless access with push-button start system:

Press any button on the remote transmitter (except when the trans- mitter battery is discharged).

Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to ON.

For details about the alarm system, refer to Alarm system F2-27.

! How to lock and unlock the vehicle by using the key

S02AC0101

1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock. 2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.

In this case, only the drivers side door is locked.

NOTE Models with keyless access with push-button start system: The emergency key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again.

! How to lock the vehicle without using the key

S02AC0102 To lock the door from outside without the key, the following methods are available.

! Locking using lock lever S02AC010201

1) Rotate the lock lever forward. 2) Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was operated will be locked.

Keys and doors/Door locks2-24

(133,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Locking using power door lock- ing switch

S02AC010202

1) Press the lock side of the power door locking switch.*

2) Close the door. *: For details about the power door locking switch, refer to How to operate the power door locking switches F2-25.

In this case, all closed doors and the rear gate (5-door models) are locked at the same time.

NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle when locking the doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking from the inside

S02AC02

! How to use the lock lever S02AC0202

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock. 2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (5-door models) are closed before starting to drive.

The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small chil- dren are in your vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acciden- tally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.

! How to operate the power door locking switches

S02AC0203 All doors and the rear gate (for 5-door models) can be locked and unlocked using the power door locking switches located at the drivers side and the front passengers side doors.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Door locks 2-25

2

(134,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Example 1) Press to lock 2) Press to unlock

NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the power door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func- tion

S02AC06 Under the following conditions, all the doors will not lock when the power door locking switch is pushed with the driver door open. . The key is still in the ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system) . The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position (models with keyless ac- cess with push-button start system) . With the drivers door open, the doors are automatically kept unlocked even if the power door locking switch is pressed to the lock position.

NOTE . When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before locking the doors. . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as operational. This functions operational/non-opera- tional setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for details.

! Non-operation of key lock-in pre- vention function

S02AC0602 When the system is set so that it does not operate, the doors are locked by the

following operation. . If the lock lever is turned to the front (LOCK) position with the drivers door open and the drivers door is then closed with the lock lever in that position, the drivers door is locked. . If the spare key is used to lock the drivers door from the outside of the vehicle, the door is locked.

& Battery drainage prevention function

S02AC03 If a door or the rear gate (5-door models) is not completely closed, the interior lights will remain illuminated as a result. How- ever, several lights are automatically turned off by the battery drainage preven- tion function to prevent the battery from discharging. The following interior lights are affected by this function.

Item Switch position

Automatically turning off

Map lights DOOR Approximately 20 minutes later

Dome light DOOR Approximately 20 minutes later

Ignition switch light Approximately 20

minutes later

Cargo area light DOOR Approximately 20

minutes later

Keys and doors/Door locks2-26

(135,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE . The default setting for this function is set as operational. The operational/ non-operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting. . When leaving the vehicle, please make sure that all doors and the rear gate (5-door models) are completely closed. . The battery drainage prevention function does not operate while the key is in the ignition switch.

Alarm system S02AF

The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system: The system can be armed or disarmed with the keyless access function or access key fob. The system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

For models without keyless access with push-button start system: The system can be armed or disarmed with the remote transmitter. The system will not be activated when the key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicles alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for deactivation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer.

& Alarm system operation S02AF01

When the alarm system is armed, it is triggered by opening any of the doors, the engine hood, the rear gate (5-door mod- els) or the trunk lid (sedan). The alarm system will activate the follow- ing alarms when triggered. . The vehicles horn will sound for 30 seconds. . The hazard warning flashers will flash for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the engine hood or the rear gate/trunk lid remains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound for a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, the engine hood or the rear gate/ trunk lid is closed while the horn is sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

NOTE The alarm system can be set to illumi- nate the following interior lights. . Map lights (illuminates only when the map lights switch is in the DOOR position) . Dome light (illuminates only when the dome light switch is in the DOOR position)

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-27

2

(136,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Cargo area light (illuminates only when the cargo area light switch is in the DOOR position)

The notifications regarding the map lights, dome light and cargo area light are deactivated as the factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Arming the system S02AF04

The alarm system becomes armed when the following operation is performed. 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if equipped) and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Carry the key and get out of the vehicle. 3. Make sure that the engine hood is closed. 4. Lock the doors using any of the following methods.

. Locking using the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to Remote keyless entry systemF2-20. . Locking using the keyless access function (if equipped). For details, refer to Locking with the door lock sensor F2-10.

. Locking using the power door lock- ing switch. For details, refer to Locking using power door locking switch F2- 25.

NOTE

Security indicator light

. All doors and the rear gate (5-door models) will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and the secur- ity indicator light will start flashing rapidly. . If any of the doors or the rear gate/ trunk lid is not fully closed, an electro- nic chirp sounds five times, the hazard warning flashers flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear

gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed. When you close the door, doors will automatically lock. 5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state, the security indicator light will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec- onds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveillance.

NOTE . The system can be armed even if the windows and/or moonroof are open. Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system. . The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- formed by your SUBARU dealer. . For sedan, if you open the trunk using the access key fob/remote trans- mitters button with the alarm system armed, the system will be temporarily placed in a standby state. The system will go back to the surveil- lance state upon locking the trunk.

Keys and doors/Alarm system2-28

(137,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. If any of the following actions is done during the standby period, the system will not switch to the surveil- lance state.

Doors (including the rear gate/ trunk lid) are unlocked using the access key fob/remote transmitter. Doors (including the rear gate/ trunk lid) are unlocked using the keyless access function (models with keyless access with push- button start system). Any door (including the rear gate/ trunk lid) is opened. The ignition switch is turned to the ON position (models without keyless access with push-button start system). Push-button ignition switch is turned to the ACC position (mod- els with keyless access with push- button start system).

& Disarming the system S02AF05

Perform either of the following procedures. . Briefly press a button (for less than 2 seconds) on the access key fob/remote transmitter. . Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures (models with keyless access with push-button start system).

Grip the front door handle. Press the rear gate opener button (5-door models). Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator light will then change slowly (once approxi- mately every 3 seconds from twice ap- proximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the alarm system has been disarmed. ! Emergency disarming

S02AF0501 If you cannot disarm the system using the access key fob/transmitter (i.e. the trans- mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system without using the access key fob/ remote transmitter. The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF to the ON position with a registered key/ access key fob.

NOTE For models with keyless access with push-button start system, if the ac- cess key fob battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in Switching power status F9-19. In such a case, replace the battery im- mediately. Refer to Replacing battery of access key fob F11-48.

& Alarm system setting S02AF11

To change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for activation or deactiva- tion, do the following. 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to Disarming the system F2-29. 2. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors, the engine hood and the rear gate (5-door models). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 4. Hold down the unlock side of the drivers power door locking switch, open the drivers door within the following 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without releasing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-29

2

(138,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Type A combination meter

Setting status

Combination meter display Horn

Activate AL on Once

Deactivate AL oF Twice

. Type B combination meter

Setting status

Combination meter display Horn

Activate AL ON Once Deactivate AL OFF Twice

NOTE Youmay have the above setting change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig- gered the alarm system

S02AF03

! To stop the alarm S02AF0301

Do any of the following operations: . Press any button on the access key fob/ remote transmitter. . Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (models without keyless access with push-button start system). . Turn the push-button ignition to the ACC position (models with keyless access with push-button start system).

NOTE Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If the immobilizer transponder is not registered, the alarm will not stop.

& Valet mode S02AF06

When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate (5-door models) and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for deactivationmode. Refer to Alarm system settingF2-29. The security indicator light will continue to flash once every 3 seconds indicating that the system is in the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for activation mode. Refer to Alarm system settingF2- 29.

Child safety locks S02AG

Each rear door has a child safety lock. When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot be opened from inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to the LOCK position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out.

Keys and doors/Child safety locks2-30

(139,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Windows S02AH

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always con- form to the following instructions without exception. . When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to prevent anyones fingers, arms, neck, head or other objects from being caught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers win- dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety rea- sons and never allow an unat- tended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.

The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

& Power window operation S02AH07

! Power window switches S02AH0701

. Drivers side power window switches:

1) For front left window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)

2) For front right window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)

3) For rear left window 4) For rear right window 5) Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster at the driver side door.

. Passengers side power window switches:

Each passenger window can be controlled by the power window switch located on the door.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Windows 2-31

2

(140,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Operating the window S02AH0702

. With one-touch auto up and down feature:

1) Automatically close* 2) Close 3) Open 4) Automatically open* *: To stop the window halfway, operate the switch to opposite side.

NOTE Avoid the following. . After the drivers window is fully closed or fully opened, the switch is continuously operated in the same direction for a few seconds. . After the windows for three or more seats are fully closed or fully opened, each switch is continuously operated

in the same direction simultaneously for a few seconds. Either of the operations described above may cause the power window breaker to operatemaking it impossible to open or close the window. Be sure to initialize the power windows. If they are not initialized, the one-touch auto up/ down function will not operate. Refer to Initialization of power window with one-touch auto up/down function F2-33. . Without one-touch auto up and down feature:

1) Close 2) Open

! Anti-entrapment function (windows with one-touch auto up/down func- tion)

S02AH0703 While closing the drivers and front pas- sengers windows automatically, if the window senses a substantial enough object trapped between the window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops. If a foreign object is caught while the drivers window or passengers window is opening automatically, the window will stop.

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test this func- tion using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

. The anti-entrapment function may not operate properly if some object gets trapped just before the window fully closes.

NOTE . If a windowdetects an impact similar to that caused by trapping an object (for example, when the vehicle encounters a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment function may operate.

Keys and doors/Windows2-32

(141,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Thewindowcannot be operated for a few seconds after the anti-entrapment function operates.

! Off delay function (windows with one-touch auto up/down function)

S02AH0705 The front windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFF position. If a front door is opened within 45 seconds, the off delay function is canceled. ! Locking the passengers windows

S02AH0704

1) Lock 2) Unlock

When the lock switch is in the lock position, the passengers windows cannot be opened or closed.

& Initializationofpowerwindow with one-touch auto up/down function

S02AH06 If the power window automatic function (one-touch auto up and down function) does not operate properly, operate each window according to the following proce- dure in order to initialize the power window system. 1. Close the door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Open the window completely and then press and hold down the power window switch for approximately 1 second. 4. Close the window completely and then pull and hold the power window switch for approximately 1 second.

Trunk lid (sedan) S02AI

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the trunk lid closed while the engine is running.

. Help prevent children, adults or animals from locking themselves in the trunk. On hot or sunny days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly become high en- ough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small chil- dren.

. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock all doors. Also make certain that the trunk is closed.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Trunk lid (sedan) 2-33

2

(142,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& To open and close the trunk lid from outside

S02AI01 The trunk lid can be opened using the keyless access function or remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to the following section. . For models with keyless access with push-button start system, refer to Open- ing trunk (sedan) F2-11 or Opening the trunk lid (sedan) F2-21. . For models without keyless access with push-button start system, refer to Opening the trunk lid (sedan) F2-21.

To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down until the latch engages.

NOTE . Do not leave your valuables in the trunk when you leave your vehicle. . Under the following conditions, the trunk can be openedwithout the access key fob.

the trunk lock/unlock setting is set to on all doors are unlocked

The trunk lock/unlock setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.

& To open the trunk lid from inside

S02AI02

Pull the trunk lid release lever upward. The lever is on the floor at the left of the drivers seat.

& Internal trunk lid release handle

S02AI04 The internal trunk lid release handle is a device designed to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. In the event children or adults become locked inside the trunk, the handle allows them to open the lid. The handle is located on the inside of the trunk lid.

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, pull the trunk lid release handle upward as indicated by the arrow on the handle. This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the lid.

The handle is made of material that remains luminescent for approximately an hour in the dark trunk space after it is exposed to ambient light even for a short time.

WARNING

Never allow any child to get in the trunk and play with the release handle. If the driver starts the vehi- cle without knowing that a child is inside the trunk and the child opens the lid using the release handle, the

Keys and doors/Trunk lid (sedan)2-34

(143,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

child could fall out and be killed or seriously injured.

CAUTION

. Donot close the lidwhile gripping the release handle. The handle may be damaged.

. Do not use the handle as a hook to fasten straps or ropes to secure your cargo in the trunk. Such usemay result in damage of the handle.

. Load the trunk so that cargo cannot strike the release handle. If the cargo hits the handle while the vehicle is being driven, the handle may be pulled up and the trunk lid may open. That may cause cargo to fall out of the trunk, which could create a traffic safety hazard.

! Inspection S02AI0401

Perform the following steps at least twice a year to check the release handle for correct operation. 1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver blade from the slit aperture of the lock assembly fully to the end until you hear a click.

This places the latch in the locked position.

3. Pull the release handle upward and check that the latch is released.

If the latch is not released, contact your SUBARU dealer. In this case, press the button on the key lug to release the latch, then close the trunk lid. Also, if the movement of the trunk lid release handle feels restricted or not entirely smooth during operation, or the handle and/or handle base is cracked, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Keys and doors/Trunk lid (sedan) 2-35

2

(144,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Rear gate (5-door models) S02AJ

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate closed while the engine is running.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the recessed grip from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.

NOTE If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due to a discharged vehicle battery, a mal- function in the door locking/unlocking systemor other causes, you can unlock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the procedure, refer to Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be opened F9- 20.

& Lock/unlock S02AJ02

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using any of the following systems. . Power door locking switch: Refer to How to operate the power door locking switches F2-25. . Keyless access with the push-button start system (if equipped): Refer to Key- less access with push-button start system F2-3. . Remote keyless entry system: Refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-20.

& Open/close S02AJ03

1) The rear gate opener button

To open: First unlock the rear gate lock then push the rear gate opener button.

To close: Lower the rear gate slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull it down holding the recessed grip.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.

Keys and doors/Rear gate (5-door models)2-36

(145,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when open- ing or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo.

Moonroof (if equipped) S02AK

WARNING

Never let anyones hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if any of the follow- ing conditions occur. . The vehicle stops suddenly. . The vehicle turns sharply. . The vehicle is involved in an

accident. . Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside objects.

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always con- form to the following instructions without exception. . Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no ones hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety rea- sons and never allow an unat- tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moon- roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en- trapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function does not operate when themoon- roof is being tilted down. Be sure to confirm that it is safe to do so before tilting themoonroof down.

. If the moonroof does not close, have the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.

The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

CONTINUED

Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-37

2

(146,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Moonroof switches S02AK02

! Tilting moonroof S02AK0201

1) Up 2) Down

To raise the moonroof, press and hold the switch in the up side and release. To lower the moonroof, press and hold the switch in the down side.

NOTE Release the switch after the moonroof has been raised or has been lowered completely. Pressing the switch con- tinuously may cause damage to the moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof S02AK0202

1) Open 2) Close

To open or close the moonroof using the automatic function, press and hold the switch toward the open/close side and release. To stop the moonroof halfway, press a switch on the moonroof switch.

NOTE After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compartment.

! Anti-entrapment function S02AK0203

When the moonroof senses a substantial enough object trapped between its glass and the vehicles roof during closure, it automatically moves back to the fully open position and stops there. The anti-entrap- ment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moonroof even when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

NOTE For the sake of safety, it is recom- mended that you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.

Keys and doors/Moonroof2-38

(147,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Sun shade S02AK05

The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.

Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-39

2

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6 Left Page

(149,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S03 Ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system) ............ 3-4 Key positions......................................................... 3-4 Key reminder chime............................................... 3-5 Ignition switch light (if equipped) ........................... 3-6

Push-button ignition switch (models with keyless access with push-button start system) ............................................................... 3-6 Safety precautions ................................................. 3-6 Operating range for push-button start system ........ 3-6 Switching power status.......................................... 3-7 When access key fob does not operate properly .... 3-8

Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8 Meters and gauges ................................................. 3-9

Speedometer ......................................................... 3-9 Tachometer............................................................ 3-9 Odometer............................................................... 3-9 Double trip meter ................................................... 3-9 Fuel gauge............................................................3-10 ECO gauge (if equipped) ....................................... 3-11 Combination meter settings .................................. 3-11

Illumination brightness control............................ 3-12 Auto dimmer cancel function (if equipped) ............3-12

Warning and indicator .......................................... 3-13 Initial illumination for system check ......................3-13 Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................3-14 SRS airbag system warning light...........................3-15 Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators ...........................................................3-15

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light .....................................................3-16

Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warning light .......................... 3-17

Charge warning light ............................................ 3-18 Oil pressure warning light..................................... 3-18 Engine low oil level warning light.......................... 3-18 Windshield washer fluid warning light................... 3-19 AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models).............. 3-19 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)............................................ 3-19

ABS warning light................................................. 3-20 Brake system warning light (red) .......................... 3-21 Low fuel warning light .......................................... 3-22 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light............................................. 3-22

Door open warning light ....................................... 3-22 All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models) .......... 3-23 Power steering warning light ................................ 3-23 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light ........ 3-24

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ....... 3-25 Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped) ...................................................... 3-25

Security indicator light.......................................... 3-30 Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT models)..................................................... 3-31

Turn signal indicator lights ................................... 3-31 High beam indicator light...................................... 3-31 High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) ....... 3-31 Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) ............ 3-32 Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)....... 3-32

Instruments and controls

3

(150,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (models with LED headlights)..............................3-32

LED headlight warning light (models with LED headlights)..........................................................3-32

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped)................................................3-32

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ............3-32 Headlight indicator light (if equipped)....................3-32 Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/ Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator (if equipped) ...........................................................3-33

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped).............3-33 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ..................3-33 RAB warning indicator (if equipped)......................3-33 RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped) ....................3-33 Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped) ....3-33

Combination meter display (color LCD) (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-34 Basic operation.....................................................3-35 Welcome screen (opening animation) and Good-bye screen (ending animation) ...................3-35

Warning screen.....................................................3-36 Telltale screen.......................................................3-36 Basic screens .......................................................3-37 Menu screens .......................................................3-39

Multi-function display (black and white) ............. 3-41 Driving information display ...................................3-41 Outside temperature indicator ...............................3-45 Clock....................................................................3-46

Multi-function display (color LCD) (if equipped)....................................................... 3-46 Features ............................................................... 3-47 Welcome screen ................................................... 3-47 Self-check screen ................................................. 3-47 Interruption screen ............................................... 3-48 Basic operation .................................................... 3-48 Basic screens....................................................... 3-49 Setting screen ...................................................... 3-56 How to get the source code using the open source............................................................... 3-61

Clock...................................................................... 3-61 Setting the clock manually.................................... 3-61 Setting the clock automatically ............................. 3-64 Regulatory information ......................................... 3-65

Light control switch ............................................. 3-65 Precautions and tips............................................. 3-65 Headlights ............................................................ 3-66 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................... 3-67 Headlight flasher .................................................. 3-68 High beam assist function (if equipped) ................ 3-68 Daytime running light system ............................... 3-71

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) (if equipped)....................................................... 3-71

Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights) ......................................................... 3-72

Fog light switch (if equipped).............................. 3-73 Steering responsive fog lights system (if equipped) ...................................................... 3-73

Instruments and controls

(151,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Turn signal lever ................................................... 3-74 One-touch lane changer ........................................3-75

Wiper and washer ................................................. 3-75 Windshield wiper and washer switches .................3-76 Rear window wiper and washer switch (5-door models) ..................................................3-78

Mirrors ................................................................... 3-79 Inside mirror .........................................................3-79 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ..........3-79

Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink

(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-80 Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-87

Defogger and deicer (if equipped) ...................... 3-88 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .............................. 3-89

Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ......... 3-90 Horn ....................................................................... 3-91

Instruments and controls

(152,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Ignition switch (models with- out keyless access with push-button start system)

S03AA

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steer- ing wheel, preventing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes amuch greater effort than usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al- ways remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could re- sult in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it banged against your knees or hands while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the ON posi- tion to the ACC or LOCK posi- tion, thereby stopping the engine. Also, if the key is attached to a key holder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch.

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE . Keep the ignition switch in the LOCK position when the engine is not running. . Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position can cause the battery to go dead. . If the ignition switch will not move from the LOCK position to the ACC position, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ignition switch.

& Key positions S03AA11

Position Description

LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.

ACC In this position the electrical accessories (audio, acces- sory power outlet, etc.) can be used.

ON This is the normal operating position after starting the en- gine.

START The engine is started in this position.

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system)3-4

(153,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position while the engine is running.

NOTE

. To turn the key from the ACC to LOCK position, the select lever must be in the P position (CVTmodels) and the key must be pushed in and turned. . If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out the key once (the security indicator light will blink), and then insert the key again and turn it to the START position again to restart the engine.

. The engine may not start in the following cases:

The key grip is touching another key or a metallic key holder.

The key is near another key that contains an immobilizer transpon- der. The key is near or touching another transmitter.

& Key reminder chime S03AA05

The reminder chime sounds when the drivers door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position.

The chime stops under the following conditions. . when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position . when the key is removed from the ignition switch . when the drivers door is closed

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system) 3-5

3

(154,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Ignition switch light (if equipped)

S03AA06 For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light illumi- nates when the drivers door is opened or when the drivers door is unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several tens of seconds and then gradually turns off under the following conditions. . when the drivers door is closed . when the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter

The light turns off immediately under the following conditions. . when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position . when all doors and the rear gate (5- door models) are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter

Push-button ignition switch (modelswith keyless access with push-button start sys- tem)

S03BG

& Safety precautions S03BG04

Refer to Safety precautions F2-4.

& Operating range for push- button start system

S03BG01

Sedan 1) Antenna 2) Operating range

5-door models 1) Antenna 2) Operating range

NOTE . If the access key fob is not detected within the operating range of the anten- nas inside the vehicle, the push-button ignition switch and the engine start cannot be operated. . Even when the access key fob is outside the vehicle, if it is placed too close to the glass, it may be possible to switch the power or to start the engine. . Do not leave the access key fob in the following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button ignition switch and the engine start. It may also cause a false warning to issue

Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with keyless access with push-button start system)3-6

(155,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

although no malfunction actually oc- curs, or not to issue a warning when any malfunction occurs.

On the instrument panel On the floor Inside the glove box Inside the door trim pocket On the rear seat On the rear shelf (sedan) Inside the trunk (sedan) In the cargo area (5-door models)

. When operating the push-button ignition switch or starting the engine, if the access key fob battery is dis- charged, perform the procedure de- scribed in Access key fob if access key fob does not operate properlyF9- 18. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to Replacing bat- tery of access key fob F11-48.

& Switching power status S03BG02

1) Operation indicator 2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the push-button ignition switch is pressed. 1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the drivers seat. 2. Shift the shift lever in neutral (MT models) or the select lever in the P position (CVT models). 3. Press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models). Every time the button is pressed, the power is switched in the sequence of OFF, ACC, ON and OFF. When the engine is stopped and the push-button ignition switch is in ACC or ON, the

operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch illuminates in orange.

Power status Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off Power is turned off.

ACC Orange

The following systems can be

used: audio and ac- cessory power

outlet.

ON

Orange (while engine is

stopped) All electrical systems can be

used.Turned off (while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. When the push-button ignition switch is left in ON (while the engine is not running) or ACC for a long time, it may result in vehicle battery discharge.

. Donot spill drinks or other liquids on the push-button ignition switch. It may cause a malfunc- tion.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with keyless access with push-button start system) 3-7

3

(156,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Do not touch the push-button ignition switch with a hand soiled with oil or other contaminants. It may cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switch does not operate smoothly, stop the operation. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switch does not illuminate even when the instrument panel illumination is turned on, have the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot sun for a long time, the surface of the push-button ignition switch may get hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTE . When operating the push-button ignition switch, firmly press it all the way. . If the push-button ignition switch is pressed quickly, the power may not turn on or off. . If the indicator light on the push- button ignition switch flashes in green when the push-button ignition switch is pressed, steering is locked. When this occurs, press the push-button ignition

switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

! Battery drainage prevention func- tion

S03BG0201 When the push-button ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON position for approxi- mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition switch will be automatically switched to OFF to prevent the battery from going dead. & When access key fob does

not operate properly S03BG03

Refer to Access key fob if access key fob does not operate properly F9-18.

Hazard warning flasher S03AB

The hazard warning flasher is used towarn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works regardless of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button on the instrument panel. All the turn signal lights and the turn signal indicator lights will flash. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.

NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher3-8

(157,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Meters and gauges S03AD

NOTE Some of the meters and gauges on the combination meter use liquid-crystal displays. You will find their indications hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.

& Speedometer S03AD03

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

& Tachometer S03AD06

The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrev- ving. The engine will resume run- ning normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.

& Odometer S03AD04

1) TRIP RESET switch 2) Type A combination meter 3) Type B combination meter

This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. The indicators will turn off when: . The TRIP RESET switch is not oper- ated for approximately 10 seconds.

. The drivers door is opened and then closed.

& Double trip meter S03AD05

1) TRIP RESET switch 2) Type A combination meter 3) Type B combination meter

This meter displays the two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown in the following sequence by pressing the TRIP RESET switch.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-9

3

(158,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP RESETswitch and keep the knob pressed for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.

NOTE . If the connection between the com- binationmeter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or fuse replacement, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost. . If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is possible to switch between the A trip meter andB tripmeter indicationswhile the odometer/trip meter is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset the trip meter by pressing and holding the TRIP RESET switch. The indicators will turn off when:

The TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 sec- onds. The drivers door is opened and then closed.

& Fuel gauge S03AD07

1) TRIP RESET switch 2) Type A combination meter 3) Type B combination meter

The fuel gauge is displayed when the ignition is in the ON position, and it shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge indication may change slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.

NOTE . You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle. . If you press the TRIP RESET switch while the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. The indicators will turn off when:

The TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 sec- onds. The drivers door is opened and then closed.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges3-10

(159,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& ECO gauge (if equipped) S03AD12

1) Type A combination meter 2) Type B combination meter

The ECO gauge shows the difference between the current rate of fuel consump- tion and the average rate of fuel consump- tion since the trip meter was last reset.

If the ECO gauge moves towards the + side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

NOTE . The ECO gauge shows only an approximate indication of fuel effi- ciency. . After resetting the trip meter, the average rate of fuel consumption is not shown until you have driven for 1 mile (or 1 km). Before that time, the ECO

gauge does not operate.

& Combination meter settings S03AD16

Meter and vehicle settings can be set on the combination meter. ! Type A combination meter

S03AD1601 Various adjustments can be made, such as switching units shown on the combina- tion meter and adjusting the warning tone volume. While the ignition switch is in the OFF position, each press of TRIP RESET switch results in items shown in the table below being switched.

Item Combination meter display

Possible settings

A trip

B trip

Gauge needle sweep function

On/Off

Changing the unit* mile/km

Warning volume* Lv. 1/Lv. 2/Lv. 3

*: if available

NOTE . If you switch the units on the combi- nation meter, the units on the multi- function display (black and white) also switches accordingly. . If either of the following conditions is met, the combination meter setting mode will be canceled.

The drivers door is opened. The TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 sec- onds or more.

! Switching method S03AD160101

1. Push the ignition switch in the OFF position.

1) TRIP RESET switch

2. Press the TRIP RESET switch repeat- CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-11

3

(160,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

edly until the item you want to change is displayed. 3. Press and hold the TRIP RESET switch while the item to be changed is displayed, the setting of the item will be switched.

! Type B combination meter S03AD1602

Meter and vehicle settings can be set on the combination meter display (color LCD). Refer to Menu screens F3-39.

Illumination brightness con- trol

S03AJ

The illumination brightness of the instru- ment panel illuminates under the following conditions. . when the light switch is in the or position . when the light control switch is in the AUTO position and the headlights illumi- nate automatically

You can adjust the illumination brightness for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE . When the control dial is turned fully upward, the illumination brightness becomes the maximum and the auto- matic dimming function does not work at all. . The brightness setting is not can- celed even when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position.

& Auto dimmer cancel function (if equipped)

S03AJ01 When the ambient light is bright, the illumination brightness is set to the max- imum regardless of the position of the control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust the illumination brightness by using the control dial.When the ambient light is dark, you can dim the illumination brightness as described above.

The operational/non-operational setting and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel function can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control3-12

(161,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Warning and indicator S03AE

& Initial illumination for system check

S03AE29 Several of the warning and indicator lights illuminate when the ignition switch is initially turned to the ON position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. For the system check, several of the following lights illuminate and then turn off after several seconds or after the engine has started. : Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the driver fastens the seat- belt.)

: Front passengers seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the front seat passenger fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON / : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator light

/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator light

: Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warn- ing light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Engine low oil level warning light

: Windshield washer fluid warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models)

: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.- spec. models)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light

: Door open warning light

: AWD warning light (CVT models)

: Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

: Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)

: Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)

: Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (models with LED head- lights)

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system. Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-13

3

(162,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Seatbelt warning light and chime S03AE01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the drivers and front passengers seat, as required by current safety standards. With the ignition switch turned to the ON position, this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by illuminating the warning lights in the loca- tions indicated in the following illustration and sounding a chime.

Drivers warning light

Front passengers warning light

! Operation S03AE0101

If the driver and/or front passenger have/ has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will illuminate for several seconds, to warn that the seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously.

NOTE . If the drivers and/or front passen- gers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened several seconds later, the seatbelt warning device operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.

At speeds lower than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between steady illumination and flashing at 15-second intervals. The chime will not sound. At speeds higher than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning operation that follows the short warn- ing after turning ON the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is turned ON next time, however, the complete se- quence of the warning operation re- sumes. For further details about can- celing the warning operation, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If there is no passenger on the front passengers seat, the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat will be deactivated. The front passengers occupant detection system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passengers seat. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the device from functioning correctly or cause the device to

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-14

(163,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

fail. . Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback. . Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket. . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passengers seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback. . Do not use front seats with their back- ward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to Manual seat F1-5.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat does not function cor- rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passengers seat is empty or it is deactivated even when the front passen- ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and its child occupant, although we strongly recommend that all children sit in the rear seat properly restrained. . Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket. . Ensure that the backward-forward po- sition and seatback of front passengers

seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front passengers seat does not function cor- rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- tions described above, immediately con- tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- tion.

& SRS airbag system warning light S03AE02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. Immediately take your vehi- cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury. . Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light . No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position

. Continuous illumination of the warning light

. Illumination of the warning light while driving

For details about the components mon- itored by the warning light, refer to SRS airbag system monitors F1-70.

& Front passengers frontal air- bag ON and OFF indicators

S03AE03

ON : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator

: Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator

The front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-15

3

(164,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The indicator is displayed near the map lights. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passengers frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain off. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passengers frontal airbag ON indicator will remain off while the OFF indicator will illuminate. With the ignition switch turned to the ON position, if both the ON and OFF indicators remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check period, the system is malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an in- spection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn- ing light/Malfunction indicator light S03AE04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi- nates while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle opera- tion without having the emission control system checked and re- paired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicles warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is at least one problem or potential problem somewhere in the emis- sion control system. ! If the light illuminates steadily

S03AE0401 If the light illuminates steadily while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ately.

NOTE This light also illuminates when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminating could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn- ing light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not turn off, take your vehicle to your author- ized SUBARU dealer immediately. ! If the light is blinking

S03AE0402 If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has been de- tected which may damage the emission control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- sion control system, you should do the following. . Reduce vehicle speed. . Avoid hard acceleration. . Avoid steep uphill grades. . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- ble.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-16

(165,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

stop blinking and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Coolant temperature low indicator light/ Coolant temperature high warning light S03AE48

CAUTION

. After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, if this indicator light/warning light be- haves in any of the following ways, the electrical system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection. It remains blinking in RED. It remains illuminated in RED

for more than 2 seconds. It remains blinking in RED and

BLUE alternately. . While driving, if this indicator

light/warning light behaves in any of the following ways, take the specified appropriate mea- sure listed below.

Blinking or illuminated in RED: Safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and refer to the emergency steps to take in the case of engine overheat- ing. After that, have the sys- tem checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer to En- gine overheating F9-13.

Blinking in RED and BLUE alternately: The electrical system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- tion.

This coolant temperature low indicator light/coolant temperature high warning light has the following three functions. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- cient warming up of the engine . Blinking in RED indicates that the engine is close to overheating . Illumination in RED indicates overheat- ing condition of the engine

For a system check, this indicator light/ warning light illuminates in RED for ap- proximately 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. After that, this indicator light/warning light

changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light turns off when the engine is warmed up sufficiently.

If the engine coolant temperature in- creases over the specified range, the indicator light/warning light blinks in RED. At this time, the engine is close to over- heating.

If the engine coolant temperature in- creases further, the indicator light/warning light illuminates in RED continuously. At this time, the engine may be overheating.

When the indicator light/warning light blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and refer to the emergency steps to take in the case of engine overheating. Refer to Engine overheating F9-13. After that, have the system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Also, if the indicator light/warning light often blinks in RED, the electrical system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-17

3

(166,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE If the engine is restarted after a certain driving condition, this indicator light/ warning light may illuminate in RED. However, this is not a malfunction if the indicator light/warning light turns off after a short time.

& Charge warning light S03AE05

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains illuminated, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Oil pressure warning light S03AE06

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly. If the light illuminates while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the proper level but the light remains i l luminated, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately. For details about checking the engine oil level or adding the engine oil, refer to Engine oil F11-8.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light illumi- nated. This may cause serious en- gine damage.

& Engine low oil level warning light S03AE58

This light illuminates when the engine oil level decreases to the lower limit. If the engine low oil level warning light illuminates while driving, park the vehicle in a safe and level location, and then check the engine oil level. When the engine oil level is not within the normal range, refill with engine oil. Refer to Engine oil F11- 8. If the warning light does not turn off after refilling the engine oil, or the warning light illuminates even though the engine oil level is within the normal range, have the

vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE . The warning light may stay illumi- nated when the engine is started straight after topping up or changing the engine oil. In such cases, park the vehicle on a level surface and wait for more than a minute until the oil level settles, after which the warning light will turn off. . The warning light may illuminate temporarily in the following conditions because a low oil level may be detected as a result of significant oil movement in the engine.

when the vehicle is considerably inclined on an uphill or steep slope when the vehicle has continu- ously accelerated and decelerated when the vehicle is continuously turned when the vehicle is driven on a road that alternates continuously between uphill and downhill

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-18

(167,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Windshield washer fluid warning light S03AE42

This light illuminates when the fluid level in the windshield washer fluid tank de- creases to the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

& AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) S03AE07

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the transmis- sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im- mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off. ! Transmission control system warn-

ing S03AE0701

If the AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes after the engine has started, it may indicate that the transmission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models) S03AE08

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the low tire pressure warn- ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there is no problem and all tires are properly inflated, the light will turn off. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- function indicator is illuminated, the sys- temmay not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-19

3

(168,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one min- ute, have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approxi- mately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, per- form the following procedure. Other- wise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious perso- nal injury could occur. 1) Keep driving straight aheadwhile

gradually reducing speed. 2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pres- sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pres- sure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approxi- mately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/ or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one min- ute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressuremonitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked peri- odically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After any change to tire pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle is first driven more than 20 mph (32 km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- sures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- tion pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pres- sure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later. Therefore, be sure to install the specified size for the front and rear tires.

& ABS warning light S03AE09

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions occur, we recommend that you have the ABS repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer. The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not turn off even

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-20

(169,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

after the vehicle is started. The warning light illuminates

during driving. . When the warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the ABS function shuts down. However, the conventional brake system continues to oper- ate normally.

The ABSwarning light illuminates together with the brake system warning light if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning F3- 21.

NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described in the following conditions, the ABS may be considered normal. . The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine has started. . The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns off immediately, remaining off. . The warning light remains illumi- nated after the engine has been started, but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off. When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may illumi- nate. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction.When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will turn off.

& Brake system warning light (red) S03AE10

This light illuminates with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the ON position. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

The brake system warning light has the following functions. ! Brake fluid level warning

S03AE1002 This light illuminates when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the MIN level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the ON position and with the parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should illuminate while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in ON), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning S03AE1003

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if the brake system warning light / , Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light and ABS warning light / illuminate simultaneously during driving.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-21

3

(170,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- tional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control. If the brake system warning light / , Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light and ABS warning light / illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat location. 2. Shut down the engine, apply the parking brake and then restart it. 3. Fully release the parking brake. 4. Even if all the warning lights do not come back on, the EBD system may have a possible malfunction. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. 5. If all the warning lights stay illuminated or come back on after approximately 2 seconds, shut down the engine, apply the parking brake and check the brake fluid level.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. ! Vacuum pressure system warning

S03AE1006 The brake systemwarning light / will illuminate when the vacuum pressure sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster pressure is decreasing. If the brake warning light continues to illuminate for several minutes after starting the engine, there may be a malfunction in the vacuum system. In this case, drive the vehicle carefully and have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer. & Low fuel warning light S03AE11

The low fuel warning light illuminates when the tank is nearly empty, at approximately 2 US gal (7.5 liters, 1.65 Imp gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when- ever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.

& Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light S03AE47

! Hill start assist warning light S03AE4701

While the engine is running, if there are any malfunctions in the Hill start assist system, the warning light will illuminate.

WARNING

When the Hill start assist warning light illuminates, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized SUBARU dealer.

! Hill start assist OFF indicator light S03AE4702

While the Hill start assist system is deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF indicator light illuminates continuously to inform the driver that the Hill start assist system is not operational.

& Dooropenwarning light S03AE12

The warning light illuminates if any door, the rear gate (5-door models) or the trunk lid (sedan) is not fully closed. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-22

(171,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

For some models, the open door is indicated by the corresponding part of the door open indicator.

Always make sure this light is not illumi- nated before you start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive warn- ing light (CVT models) S03AE13

This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with tires of differing diameters fitted on the wheels or with an excessively low air pressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe location then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason. Continuing to drive with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage.

NOTE If the temporary spare tire is used, the AWDwarning lightmay flash. Use of the temporary spare tire should therefore be restricted to the minimum time necessary. Replace the temporary

spare tire with a conventional tire as soon as possible.

& Power steeringwarning light S03AE53

While the engine is running, this warning light illuminates when a malfunction has been detected in the electric power steer- ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immedi- ately.

NOTE If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the con- trol computer and drive motor, from overheating. . The steering wheel is operated fre- quently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn- ing the steering wheel during parallel parking. . The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.

At this time, there will be more resis- tance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in a non-standard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too frequently, that may result in a malfunction of the power steering control system.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-23

3

(172,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol warning light/Vehi- cle Dynamics Control operation indicator light S03AE14

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

S03AE1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control. As a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system also becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to illuminate. Although both the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and ABS are inop- erative in this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe while driving with this condition, but drive carefully and have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system itself mal- functions, the warning light only illumi- nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) remains fully opera- tional. . The warning light illuminates when the electronic control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunctions. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- ately. . The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. . The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.

NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal. . The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine has started.

. The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns off immediately, remaining off. . The warning light illuminates after the engine has started and turns off while the vehicle is subsequently being driven. . The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off. . The warning light illuminates when the engine has stalled and continues to illuminate after the engine has been restarted. However, it will turn off once the vehicle starts moving.

! VehicleDynamicsControl operation indicator light

S03AE1402 The indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and during activation of the traction control function.

NOTE . The light may remain illuminated for a short period of time after the engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light should turn off as soon as the engine has warmed up.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-24

(173,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. The indicator light illuminates when the engine has developed a problem and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ malfunction indicator light is on. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under the follow- ing condition. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . The light does not turn off even after the lapse of several minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the engine has started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol OFF indicator light S03AE15

The light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- ately. . The light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. . The light does not turn off even once several seconds have elapsed after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position.

& Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start sys- tem (if equipped) S03AE55

Access key warning indicator The warning chime and the access key warning light serve the following purposes: . To minimize improper operation of the keyless access with push-button start system. . To protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or the warning indicator flashes, take the appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indica- tor on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green when starting the engine. This indicates the status that the steering wheel is not released and could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again after the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green, if the operation indicator is still flashing in green, there could be a steering lock malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos- sible.

. When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in orange, contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-25

3

(174,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE . When doors are not locked because the access key fob is left inside the trunk, you cannot open the trunk lid by pushing the trunk opener button on the trunk lid. Pull the trunk lid release lever upward to open the trunk lid. Refer to To open the trunk lid from insideF2- 34. . Do not leave the access key fob inside the trunk. Depending on the status of the access key fob and situation, the trunk lockout protect function may not operate. Make sure that you carry the access key fob, and close the trunk lid. . Even when the access key fob is within the operating ranges inside the vehicle, the access key warning for engine start may be provided depend- ing on the status of the access key fob and the environmental conditions. . When the access key fob is taken out of the vehicle through an open window, the access key fob takeout warning or passenger access key fob takeout warning will not be provided.

! List of warnings S03AE5504

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings occurs even if the access key warn- ing indicator does not appear, take the appropriate action.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-26

(175,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Operation indicator on push-button igni-

tion switch Status Action

Ding, ding ...

(intermittent)

The drivers door was opened while the push-button ignition switch is ACC (in CVT models, when the select lever is in the P position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF, or close the drivers door. *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF.

The push-button ignition switch was switched to OFF while the drivers door is open.

Close the drivers door.

Ding Short beep (2 seconds)

Lockout warning: An attempt was made to lock all doors while the access key fob is left inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and lock the doors. *The doors cannot be locked while the access key fob is inside the vehicle. *A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will be unlocked.

Short beep (2 seconds)

Trunk lockout warning: The trunk was closed with the access key fob in it while all doors are locked (or during the automatic lock time period) (sedan).

Take out the access key fob from the trunk, and close the trunk. *By pressing the trunk opener button after this warning chime sounds, the trunk can be unlocked.

Access key fob lock-in warning: The door lock sensor was touched while the push-button ignition switch is OFF and the access key fob is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and lock the doors. *If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the doors cannot be locked.

Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep (5 times)

Door ajar warning: The door lock sensor is touched while the ignition switch is in the OFF position and one of the doors including the rear gate is opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them. *If one of the doors including the rear gate is opened, the doors cannot be locked.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-27

3

(176,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Operation indicator on push-button igni-

tion switch Status Action

Ding Long beep (60 seconds max.)

Power warning: The door lock sensor was touched while carrying the access key fob, the push- button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF (in CVT models, when the select lever is in the P position).

Return the access key fob inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF. *If the push-button ignition switch is not switched to OFF, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding, ding ...

(7 seconds)

Access key warning: The vehicle was driven while the access key fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive the vehicle.

Ding Access key warning for engine start: The push-button ignition switch was pressed while the access key fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and press the push-button ignition switch.

Ding Beep, beep, beep (3 times)

Access key takeout warning: The driver exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed the drivers door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF (in CVT models, when the select lever is in the P position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding Beep, beep, beep (3 times)

Passenger access key takeout warn- ing: A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed a door other than the drivers door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF.

Return the access key fob to inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-28

(177,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Operation indicator on push-button igni-

tion switch Status Action

Long beep (continuous)

Long beep (continuous)

Access key takeout without P position warning (CVT models): The driver exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed the drivers door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF and the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

Shift the select lever to the P position, switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF and exit the vehicle.

Long beep (continuous)

Select lever position warning (CVT models): The engine is turned off by pressing the push-button ignition switch and the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

Start the engine, shift the select lever to the P position, switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF and exit the vehicle.

Long beep (continuous)

Select lever position warning (CVT models): The drivers door was opened while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than OFF and the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

Shift the select lever to the P position, switch the push-button ignition switch to OFF and exit the vehicle.

Ding The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding Flashes in green (15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning: The engine start procedure was per- formed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and left lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the push-button ignition switch.

Ding Flashes in orange (15 seconds max.)

System malfunction warning: A malfunction was detected in the power system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and have the vehicle inspected.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-29

3

(178,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Security indicator light S03AE16

This indicator light shows the status of the alarm system. It also indicates operation of the immobilizer system. ! Alarm system

S03AE1601 It blinks to show the driver the operational status of the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to Alarm system F2- 27. ! Immobilizer system

S03AE1602 The security indicator light starts blinking in the following conditions.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system: . Immediately after the push-button igni- tion switch is turned to the OFF position. . Immediately after the drivers door is opened or closed when all of the following conditions are met.

The push-button ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is used (for example, the key is unregistered or the ID code does not match), the power is not switched to ON and the security indicator light continues blinking.

For models without keyless access

with push-button start system: . Approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position. . Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the above conditions, it may indicate that immobilizer system may be malfunction- ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for example, an unauthorized duplicate) is used to start the engine, the security indicator light illuminates. For details about the immobilizer system, refer to Immobi- lizer F2-18.

NOTE . The security indicator light remains off in the following conditions. It means that the matching of the ID code is completed and the immobilizer system is deactivated, and it does not indicate a malfunction.

Models with keyless access with push-button start system: while the engine is running the push-button ignition switch has been turned to the ON or ACC position and the drivers

door has not been opened or closed

Models without keyless access with push-button start system: while the engine is running for approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such as the security indicator light flashes irregularly, it will not affect the func- tionality of the immobilizer system.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-30

(179,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Select lever/gear position in- dicator (CVT models)

S03AE43

Type A 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Select lever/gear position indicator

Type B 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the select lever.

For models with manual mode, when the manualmode is selected, the gear position indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and the upshift/downshift indi- cator light up. Refer to Continuously variable transmission F7-23.

& Turn signal indicator lights S03AE20

These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to Replacing bulbs F11-38.

& High beam indicator light S03AE21

This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode. This indicator light also illuminates when the headlight flasher is operated.

& High beam assist indi- cator light (if equipped) S03AE83

This light illuminates when the high beam assist function is activated. For details about the high beam assist function, refer to High beam assist function F3-68.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-31

3

(180,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) S03AE22

This light illuminates when the cruise control main button is pressed to activate the cruise control function. For details, refer to To set cruise control F7-46. If this light blinks, do not use the cruise control. In addition, if it blinks frequently, contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ malfunction indicator light illumi- nates, the cruise control indicator light flashes at the same time. At this time, avoid driving at high speed and have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- ble.

& Cruise control set indi- cator light (if equipped) S03AE23

This light illuminates when vehicle speed has been set to use the cruise control function. Refer to To set cruise control F7-46.

& Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (models with LED headlights) S03AE33

This light illuminates when the automatic headlight beam leveler does not operate normally. If this light illuminates during driving, have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer.

& LED headlight warning light (models with LED headlights) S03AE76

This light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped) S03AE89

This light illuminates when the Steering Responsive Headlight OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the Steering Re- sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes when a malfunction occurs in the Steering Responsive Headlight. Refer to Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) F3-71.

& Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) S03AE25

This indicator light illuminates while the front fog lights are illuminated.

& Headlight indicator light (if equipped) S03AE24

This indicator light illuminates under the following conditions. . when the light switch is turned to the or position . when the light control switch is in the AUTO position and the headlights illumi- nate automatically

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator3-32

(181,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Steering responsive fog lights warning indica- tor/Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator (if equipped) S03AE77

NOTE For details about the steering respon- sive fog lights system, refer to Steer- ing responsive fog lights system F3- 73.

! Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator

S03AE7701 This indicator appears when the steering responsive fog lights systemmalfunctions. When this indicator appears while the system is activated, contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. ! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator S03AE7702

This indicator appears when the steering responsive fog lights system is deacti- vated. This indicator disappears when the system is activated.

& BSD/RCTA warning in- dicator (if equipped) S03AE80

This warning indicator appears when the BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be shown on the combination meter display (color LCD). When this indicator appears, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indica- tor (if equipped) S03AE86

The indicator appears when the BSD/ RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the BSD/RCTA, or when the BSD/RCTA is suspended temporarily. In this case the BSD/RCTAOFF indicator will be shown on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to BSD/RCTA F7-49.

& RAB warning indicator (if equipped) S03AE91

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse Automatic Braking System malfunctions. Refer to Reverse Automatic Braking System F7-59.

& RABOFF indicator light (if equipped) S03AE92

This indicator illuminates when the Re- verse Automatic Braking System is turned OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic Braking System is suspended temporarily. Refer to Reverse Automatic Braking System F7-59.

& Icy road surface warn- ing indicator (if equipped) S03AE82

When the outside temperature is 378F (38C) or less, the icy road surface warning indicator will illuminate to inform the driver that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE . The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature in the area around the sensor. Therefore, the tem- perature indication may differ from the actual outside air temperature. . Treat the icy road surface warning indicator only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of the road surface before driving. . Once the icy road surface warning indicator appears, it will not disappear unless the outside temperature has increased to 418F (58C) or higher.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-33

3

(182,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Combination meter display (color LCD) (if equipped)

S03BN

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the combination meter display (color LCD) while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the combination meter display (color LCD) interferes with your ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you to look away from the road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the combination meter display (color LCD). Also, a warning message will appear on the display if a malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition, several settings for the displayed content can be performed. Combination meter display (color LCD)

1) ECO gauge 2) Warning screen (refer to Warning

screen F3-36.)/Basic screen (refer to Basic screens F3-37.)

3) EyeSight screen 4) Cruise control information display* 5) Telltale screen (refer to Telltale screen

F3-36.) 6) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer

to Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT models) F3-31.)

7) Odometer (refer to Odometer F3-9.)/ double trip meter (refer to Double trip meter F3-9.)

8) Fuel gauge (refer to Fuel gauge F3- 10.)

A: Models without the EyeSight system Models with the EyeSight system: when the EyeSight system is deacti- vated.

B: Models with the EyeSight system: when the EyeSight system is activated.

*: For models with the EyeSight system, the cruise control information display will not be shown when the EyeSight system is deactivated.

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)3-34

(183,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Basic operation S03BN01

Control switch 1) (Up) 2) /SET (enter) 3) (Down)

By operating or of the control switch, the screens and selection items can be switched. When the /SET switch is pulled toward you, the item can be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such as vehicle information, warning informa- tion, etc., they will interrupt the current screen, and appear on the display accom- panied by a beep. If such a screen is displayed, take proper action according to the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. While the information reminder is shown on the display, it may be possible to display the warning screen again. To recall the message marked with on the display, pull the /SET switch on the steering wheel toward you.

NOTE When the multi-function display (color LCD) is set to the setting screen, the combination meter display (color LCD) cannot be controlled pressing on the , and /SET on the control switch.

& Welcome screen (opening animation) and Good-bye screen (ending animation)

S03BN08 When the drivers door is opened and closed after unlocking the door, the wel- come screen (opening animation) will appear on the combination meter display (color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds. When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position, the combination meter display (color LCD) gradually turns off with showing the Good-bye screen (ending animation).

NOTE . The welcome screen and the good- bye screen may differ in the actual words and appearance. . Once thewelcome screen appears, it takes a certain period of time to display it again. . If the ignition switch is operated after unlocking the drivers door, the welcome screen will not appear even when the drivers door is opened and closed. . The welcome screen will disappear when you lock the drivers door by using the remote keyless entry system (all models) or the keyless access function (if equipped) while the wel- come screen is displayed. . The welcome screen including the multi-function display (color LCD) (if equipped) and the audio/navigation unit can be set to on or off. For details, refer to Welcome Screen F3-39.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD) 3-35

3

(184,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Warning screen S03BN05

Example of warning If there is a warning message or a maintenance notification, it will appear on this screen. Take the appropriate actions based on the messages indicated.

& Telltale screen S03BN09

1) Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs, the following telltales will be displayed on the telltale screen.

NOTE When there is warning information to display, it will be displayed in five warning indicators, starting on the left in ascending order of severity. If there are six or more warning information displayed, pull the /SET switch and check the item.

Mark Name Page

Door open indicator 3-22

LED headlight warning indicator (if equipped) 3-32

High beam assist indi- cator (if equipped) 3-31

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light (if equipped)

3-32

Engine low oil level warning indicator 3-18

RAB warning indicator (if equipped) 3-33

RAB OFF indicator (if equipped) 3-33

BSD/RCTA warning in- dicator (if equipped) 3-33

BSD/RCTA OFF indi- cator (if equipped) 3-33

Automatic headlight beam leveler system malfunction warning (models with LED headlights)

3-32

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)3-36

(185,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Mark Name Page Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator (if equipped)

3-33

Windshield washer fluid warning light 3-19

Icy road surface warn- ing indicator 3-33

& Basic screens S03BN06

By operating the or switch on the steeringwheel, you can change the screen that is always displayed. Average fuel consumption screen:

: Average fuel consumption : Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.

NOTE The driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on remaining fuel, so you must immedi- ately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

: Current fuel consumption : Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the rate of fuel consumption at the present moment.

NOTE The driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on remaining fuel, so you must immedi- ately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD) 3-37

3

(186,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Driving information screen:

: Journey time : Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position) and journey distance (the distance that has been driven since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position).

Digital speed screen:

1) Speed limit (if equipped) 2) Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle speed.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

This screen displays each tire pressure. When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire and the tire pressure will be displayed on the screen in yellow.

NOTE The tire pressure values are displayed several minutes after driving.

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)3-38

(187,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull and hold the /SET switch to enter the menu screen.

& Menu screens S03BN07

Pull and hold the /SET switch to enter the menu screens when all of the following conditions are satisfied. . The menu screen entering screen is selected. . The information reminder is off.

NOTE . While driving, the setting items available on the combination meter display (color LCD) are limited. . For function settings and adjust- ments on the combination meter dis- play, refer to Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD) F25. By operating the or switch on the steering wheel, you can select the menu. Pull the /SET switch to enter the selected menu.

NOTE If you enter the Go Back menu, the system will return to the previous screen.

! Screen Settings S03BN0701

After entering the Screen Settings menu, select one of the following menus.

! Welcome Screen S03BN070101

The combination meter display (color LCD), multi-function display (color LCD), and audio/navigation unit of welcome screen can be activated or deactivated.

! Good-bye Screen S03BN070106

The good-bye screen can be activated or deactivated.

! Gauge Initial Movement S03BN070102

The movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that occurs when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position can be activated or deactivated.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD) 3-39

3

(188,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Units S03BN070108

Changes the units displayed in the combi- nation meter display (color LCD), the type A multi-function display (black and white) and the type Bmulti-function display (color LCD).

! Tire Pressure Units (if equipped) S03BN070109

Changes the units displayed in the Tire Pressure Monitoring system.

! Languages S03BN070103

Changes the language displayed in the combination meter display (color LCD) and the multi-function display (color LCD). ! Warning Volume (if equipped)

S03BN0713 Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the BSD/RCTA warning volume and the RAB warning volume. ! EyeSight (models with the EyeSight

system) S03BN0702

NOTE Refer to the Owners Manual supple- ment for the EyeSight system.

! RAB (models with the EyeSight system)

S03BN0712 The Sonar Audible Alarm can be set to on or off.

NOTE For details about the Reverse Auto- matic Braking system, refer to Re- verse Automatic Braking System F7- 59.

! Sonar Audible Alarm S03BN071204

When the Reverse Automatic Braking system is in operation, the warning sound to notify that an obstacle is detected in the rear can be activated or deactivated. ! Vehicle Setting

S03BN0708 After entering the Vehicle Setting menu, select one of the following menus.

! Keyless Entry System S03BN070801

Sets the settings used when the keyless access function was operated. . Audible Signal (if equipped) Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when the door is locked or unlocked. . Hazard Warning Flasher Sets the operation of the hazard warning flasher that blinks when the door is locked or unlocked.

. Security Relocking (if equipped) The automatic locking operation period can be set or customized. Select the preferred seconds to customize the opera- tion period. . Driver Door Unlock (if equipped) Select only the drivers door to unlock or all doors to unlock simultaneously when the drivers door is unlocked. . Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped) Select only the rear gate to unlock or all doors to unlock simultaneously when accessing from the cargo area.

! Defogger S03BN070802

Sets and customizes the operation of the defogger.

! Interior Light S03BN070803

Sets and customizes the interior light off delay timer.

! Auto Light Sensor (if equipped) S03BN070804

Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the auto light sensor.

! Welcome Lighting (if equipped) S03BN070806

Sets the leaving time and approaching time.

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)3-40

(189,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Approaching time set Sets the illumination time of the headlights that illuminate when you approach the vehicle. . Leaving time set Sets the time until the headlights turn off when you have moved away from the vehicle.

! One-touch lane changer S03BN070807

Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off. ! Default Settings

S03BN0704 Select Yes to use the menu screen to restore customized settings to the factory default settings. Select No to return to the previous screen without restoring to the factory default settings.

Multi-function display (black and white)

S03BO

NOTE For models with multi-function display (color LCD), refer to Multi-function display (color LCD) F3-46.

1) Outside temperature indicator 2) Driving information display 3) Clock

With the ignition switch in the ACC position, the clock appears on the display.

With the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion, the outside temperature indicator, driving information display and clock all appear on the display.

NOTE The indicated values vary in accor- dance with changes in the vehicles running conditions. Also, the indicated values may differ slightly from the actual values and should thus be treated only as a guide.

& Driving information display S03BO09

NOTE You can set the units for both the multi- function display (black and white) and the combination meter at the same time. For details about setting the language and units, refer to Type A combination meter F3-11 or Menu screens F3-39.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white) 3-41

3

(190,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! How to change the information dis- play

S03BO0910

1) INFO button

Pressing the INFO button on the steering wheel switches the display in the following sequence.

*: models without combination meter dis- play (color LCD)

! Driving range on remaining fuel S03BO0903

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH 2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h

The driving range indicates the distance that can be driven taking into account the amount of fuel remaining in the tank and the average rate of fuel consumption.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)3-42

(191,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH 2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h

If the driving range is shown as , there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank.

NOTE The driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on remaining fuel, so you must immedi- ately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

! Average fuel consumption S03BO0902

1) Displays the driving range per gallon of fuel

2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel 3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100

km

This display shows the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.

1) TRIP RESET switch

Press the TRIP RESET switch to switch between the displays for the average fuel consumption that corresponds to the A trip meter mileage and the average fuel con- sumption that corresponds to the B trip meter mileage. When the trip meter displays is reset, the corresponding average fuel consumption value is also reset.

NOTE . When the trip meter display is reset, the average fuel consumption corre- sponding to that trip meter display is not shown until the vehicle has subse- quently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1 km).

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white) 3-43

3

(192,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. The units formeasuring average fuel consumption cannot be changed.

! Current fuel consumption S03BO0901

1) Displays the driving range per gallon of fuel

2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel 3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100

km This indication shows the rate of fuel consumption at the present moment.

! Journey time (models without com- bination meter display (color LCD))

S03BO0904

The journey time shows the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the ON position.

The journey time indication flashes each time a complete hour has elapsed. If the display is giving a reading other than the journey time, the display switches to the journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and returns to its original reading each time a complete hour has elapsed.

NOTE The journey time is reset when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK/OFF position.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)3-44

(193,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Average vehicle speed S03BO0905

1) When units in miles is selected 2) When units in km is selected

This display shows the average vehicle speed since the trip meter was last reset. Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles the display between the average vehicle speed corresponding to the A trip meter display and the average vehicle speed corresponding to the B trip meter display. When either of the trip meter displays is reset, the corresponding average vehicle speed value is also reset.

NOTE When either trip meter display is reset, the average vehicle speed correspond- ing to that trip meter display is not shown until the vehicle has subse- quently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1 km).

! Turn off display of driving informa- tion display

S03BO0906 Select the blank space in the menu to exit the driving information display selection.

NOTE . The average fuel consumption and average vehicle speed are calculated even while the driving information dis- play is not displayed. . Even if you turn off the driving information display, the display will automatically turn on when the battery voltage is disconnected and then re- connected for battery replacement or fuse replacement.

& Outside temperature indica- tor

S03BO01

1) U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator shows.

NOTE . The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature in- dication may differ from the actual outside air temperature. . The temperature unit cannot be changed.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white) 3-45

3

(194,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Road surface freeze warning indi- cation

S03BO0101

1) U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models

When the outside temperature drops to a certain temperature or lower, the tempera- ture indication flashes for 5 seconds to show that the road surface may be frozen. If the display is already indicating that the outside temperature is low when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indication does not flash.

NOTE The outside temperature indication may differ from the actual outside temperature. The road surface freeze warning indication should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of the road surface before driving.

& Clock S03BO10

For details about clock setting, refer to Clock F3-61.

Multi-function display (color LCD) (if equipped)

S03BP

NOTE For models with multi-function display (black and white), refer to Multi-func- tion display (black and white) F3-41.

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the multi-function display (color LCD) while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the multi-function dis- play (color LCD) is disturbing your awareness and ability to concen- trate on driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place before performing op- erations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you to look away from the road and could result in an accident.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-46

(195,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Features S03BP25

The multi-function display (color LCD) has the following functions.

Description Page

Displays useful messages, such as notification, etc. 3-48

Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel consumption screen, etc.) 3-49

Sets and adjusts maintenance notification 3-60

Also, themulti-function display (color LCD) can also be used to set and initialize the multi-function display (color LCD) itself.

NOTE . When the vehicle is in motion, certain functions and selections may not be available. . You can set the language and units for both the multi-function display (color LCD) and the combination meter at the same time. For details about setting the language and units, refer to Menu screens F3-39. . The images displayed in this Own- ers Manual are sample images. The actual image may vary depending on the market and vehicle specifications.

& Welcome screen S03BP07

When the drivers door is opened and closed, the welcome screen will appear for a short time.

NOTE . The welcome screen will disappear when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position while the welcome screen is displayed. . Thewelcome screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to Screen Settings F3-39. . For a certain period of time after the welcome screen has once appeared, it may not appear again even when the drivers door is opened and closed again. This does not indicate a mal- function.

& Self-check screen S03BP09

NOTE When the setting is On, the self check screen appears. For details about this setting, refer to On/Off settingF3-60. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the vehicle self-check will be performed. The screens corresponding to the following items will appear one after another for several seconds each.

1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine oil replacement.

2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter replacement.

3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation. 4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

When the checks are performed, the color of the icon corresponding to the checked item will change. If there is a notification, the message will be displayed. Take the appropriate actions based on the message indicated. After the self-check is completed, todays date, the stored birthday or the stored anniversary is displayed.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-47

3

(196,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE . After performing the maintenance, change the setting of the correspond- ing maintenance item. For details, refer to Maintenance settings F3-60. . Themaintenance notification screen will be displayed under either of the following conditions.

The period of time remaining until the registered notification date is 15 days or less. The total driving distance remain- ing until the registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) or less.

. Themaintenance notification screen will be displayed until either of the following conditions is satisfied.

The period of time passed after the registered notification date is 15 days or more. The total distance driven after the registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) or more.

& Interruption screen S03BP19

Example Useful messages, such as reminder in- formation, weather information (if equipped) and traffic information (if equipped)may interrupt the current screen and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. Take proper action according to the message.

The interruption screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. Also, you can press the INFO button to skip the interruption screen.

& Basic operation S03BP06

Control switch 1) INFO button 2) 3) /SET 4)

Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the basic screen. You can operate the items on the setting screen by using the , and /SET switches.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-48

(197,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Basic screens S03BP10

1) Clock 2) Climate control (if equipped)* 3) Outside temperature 4) Information screen *: This is not displayed on the multi-function display (color LCD) when the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

While the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the basic screen will be displayed. ! Outside temperature indicator

S03BP1016 The outside temperature is displayed on the multi-function display (color LCD).

NOTE . The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature in- dication may differ from the actual outside air temperature. . The temperature unit cannot be changed.

! Climate control screen (if equipped) S03BP1017

The climate control status is displayed on the multi-function display (color LCD).

Climate control screen 1) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side) 2) FULL AUTO indicator 3) AUTO indicator 4) Airflow mode indicator 5) Set temperature indicator (right-hand

side)*1 6) Air inlet selection indicator 7) SYNC indicator*1 8) Fan speed indicator 9) Air conditioner ON indicator *1: Models with the SYNC function only

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-49

3

(198,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

When operating the climate control sys- tem, the basic screen switches to the climate control screen. For details about climate control operation, refer to Climate control panel F4-2. ! Clock

S03BP1018 The clock can be displayed in either 12- hour display or 24-hour display. For details about the setting, refer toClock F3-61.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-50

(199,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Information screen S03BP1019

Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.

Content Description Page Electric components operating status screen Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 3-52 Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 3-52

EyeSight screen*1 Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 3-53 Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 3-53

Weather information screen*2 Displays weather information. 3-54 Traffic information*2/Navigation*3 screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 3-54

Audio screen Displays audio system information. 3-55

Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 3-55 Clock screen Displays the clock. 3-55

Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen. 3-56

*1: Models with the EyeSight system *2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio *3: Models with navigation system

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-51

3

(200,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Electric components operation screen

S03BP101901

1) Lane Departure/Sway Warning indica- tor*1

2) Pre-Collision Braking System indicator*1 3) Stop lights 4) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)*1 5) BSD/RCTA*1 6) Headlights*2 7) Front fog lights*2 8) Turn signals 9) Auto on/off headlights*1 *1: If equipped *2: The daytime running lights are not dis- played.

This screen displays the electric compo- nents operation status of the vehicle.

NOTE . Indicators do not display for func- tions that are not equipped to the vehicle. . The indicators of functions that are not operating are displayed in grey. . For models with auto on/off head- lights; If the multi-function display (color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse is removed, the Auto on/off headlights indicator turns off on themulti-function display (color LCD). After reinstalling the removed multi-function display (color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse to the vehicle, the Auto on/off headlights indicator will appear once more if the light control switch is turned to the AUTO position. . The exterior lights indicators on the screen still illuminate even when the bulbs are burned out. The indicators do not notify the driver that the bulbs are burned out.

! Prevention safety screen S03BP101902

1) Telltale screen 2) Steering angle 3) Vehicle posture 4) Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status func- tions. For functions that are operating, the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE The vehicle posture indication may differ from the actual vehicle posture.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-52

(201,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! EyeSight screen (modelswith the EyeSight system)

S03BP101903

1) Lead vehicle indicator 2) Your own vehicle indicator 3) Stop lights 4) Road line indicator 5) Lane indicator

This screen displays the status of the EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica- tor moves forward and backward depend- ing on the distance with the vehicle in front. For details, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

! Favorite screen S03BP101904

Favorite screen (display example) This screen displays up to three optional pieces of information that can be selected from the following items.

Item Details

The engine coolant temperature is displayed.

The engine oil temperature is displayed.

The average vehicle speed is displayed.

The accelerator opening ratio is displayed.

The vehicle posture is displayed.

The current rate of fuel consump- tion is displayed.

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.*1

The weather information is dis- played.*2

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-53

3

(202,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Item Details

The posted speed limit of the road you are currently driving on is displayed.*1

The calendar is displayed.

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped *2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTE Some displayed items may be not displayed depending on the model and specifications. The items shown in the favorite screen can be changed. For details, refer to Favorite setting F3-59.

! Weather information screen (if equipped)

S03BP101905

1) Weather information for the destination.* 2) Weather information for the current loca-

tion. *: Only when a destination is set in the navigation system

The weather information is displayed on the screen.

NOTE . When all of the following conditions are satisfied, weather information is displayed.

The vehicle is equipped with an audio and navigation system for SiriusXM satellite radio. You have a current SiriusXM satellite radio subscription.

. The weather forecast for the set destination remains displayed until a new destination is set or until you reach the destination. . Depending on the reception timing of XM, the display of weather informa- tion may be delayed.

! Navigation screen (models with navigation system)

S03BP101906

The navigation system information to the destination is displayed on the screen.

NOTE When a destination is not set in the navigation system, the compass orien- tation, name, route sign and speed limit of the road the vehicle is traveling on remain displayed on the screen.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-54

(203,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Audio screen S03BP101907

The screen of the currently selected audio source is displayed. For details about how to use the audio set, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owners Manual.

! Fuel consumption screen S03BP101908

1) Driving range on remaining fuel 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter 3) Current fuel consumption

The fuel consumption information is dis- played on the screen.

NOTE The driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on remaining fuel, so you must immedi- ately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

! Clock/date screen S03BP101909

The time and date are displayed. You can adjust the time and date. For details, refer to Clock F3-61.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-55

3

(204,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Guidance screen S03BP101910

When the INFO button on the steering wheel is pressed and held on this screen, the setting screen can be displayed. For details, refer to Setting screen F3- 56.

NOTE When the combination meter display (color LCD) is displaying the menu screen entering screen, the system will not move to the setting screen even if the INFO button is pressed and held.

& Setting screen S03BP28

1. Press and hold the INFO button on the guidance screen. The top menu is dis- played. 2. Operate the or switch to select the preferred menu from the top menu. 3. Pull the /SET switch to enter the selected menu. 4. Operate the or switch to select the preferred menu from the 2nd menu. 5. Pull the /SET switch to enter the selected menu.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-56

(205,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The menu list is as follows.

Top menu 2nd menu Description Page Time/Date Time/Date* Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-58

Birthday Set a birthday. 3-58 Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-58

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. Display/Beep Screen Off* Turn the screen on or off. Yes or No 3-58

Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 3-59 Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-59

Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-59 Go Back Return to the 1st menu.

Maintenance Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-60

Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-60 Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-60

Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-60

ON/OFF Turn on or off the self-check screen that is activated when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

On or Off 3-60

Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-60 Go Back Return to the 1st menu.

Initialize Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-61 Go Back Return to the setting screen.

*: You can also set this while driving.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-57

3

(206,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Date and time settings S03BP2801

You can set the date, time and 12h or 24h format settings.

! Current date and time setting S03BP280101

For details about clock setting, refer to Clock F3-61.

! Birthday setting S03BP280102

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, a message will be displayed when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This function can be set to on or off. For details, refer to Bypass screen setting F3-59. 1. Select Birthday from the 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Select from the list the number that you

want to register.

3. Enter the date and the text by using the control switches. 4. Select Set to exit settings. Select Go Back to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE You can store a maximum of 5 birth- days.

! Anniversary setting S03BP280103

1. The procedure for setting an anniver- sary is the same as Birthday settingF3- 58, except that in step 1 Anniversary is selected.

NOTE You can store a maximum of 5 anniver- saries.

! Display/Beep settings S03BP2805

You can set the display settings and volume settings.

! Screen OFF setting S03BP280501

1. Select Screen Off from the 2nd menu in setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Select Yes to turn off the screen. Select No to return to the previous screen.

Restoring the screen When the INFO button is operated after

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-58

(207,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, the screenwill be restored. The screen will be restored with the basic screen that was displayed when the screen was turned off.

NOTE While the screen is off, the screen switches to the climate control screen only when the climate control system is operated.

! Favorite setting S03BP280502

1. Select the Favorite from the 2nd menu in setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Set the desired items by using the control switches. For details about items, refer to Favorite screen F3-53.

3. Select Set to exit settings. Select Go Back to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE . You can display a maximum of the 3 items. . The same item cannot be selected for the left, center or right location. . Weather information for 3 hours later or 6 hours later can be displayed.

! Bypass screen setting S03BP280503

1. Select Bypass Screen from the 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Select On or Off to turn the display of items on or off by using the control

switches. 3. Select Set to exit settings. Select Go Back to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE Traffic information setting is only dis- played for the audio unit with SiriusXM satellite radio.

! Beep setting S03BP280504

1. Select Beep from the 2ndmenu in the setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Set the beep volume by using the control switches. 3. Select Set to exit settings. Select Go Back to return to the previous screen

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-59

3

(208,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

without applying the setting changes.

! Maintenance settings S03BP2803

You can set maintenance reminders.

! Engine oil setting S03BP280301

1. Select Engine Oil from the 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Set the date and distance of the reminder by using the control switches. 3. Select Set to exit settings. Select Update to change the notification dis- tance to the default value. Select Go Back to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE . The reminder will be displayed by either date or distance in accordance with the setting. . Even when either Day or Dis- tance are displayed as _ _ a pop-up screen will appear. . The reminder will be displayed until either of the following conditions is satisfied.

The period of time passed after the registered notification date is 15 days or more. The total distance driven after the registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) or more.

! Oil filter setting S03BP280302

The setting procedure is the same as Engine oil setting F3-60, but select the Oil Filter item in step 1.

! Tires setting S03BP280303

The setting procedure is the same as Engine oil setting F3-60, but select the Tires item in step 1.

! Maintenance schedule setting S03BP280304

The setting procedure is the same as Engine oil setting F3-60, but select the Maintenance Schedule item in step 1.

! On/Off setting S03BP280305

1. Select On/Off from the 2nd menu on the setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Select On or Off to turn the opening screen on or off by using the control switches. 3. Select Set to exit settings. Select Go Back to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

! Clear setting S03BP280306

1. Select Clear All Settings from the 2nd menu on the setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)3-60

(209,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

2. Select Yes or No by using the control switches.

! Initialize S03BP2804

You can initialize the items that have been set to your preference. 1. Select Initialize from the 2ndmenu on the setting screen. Refer to Setting screen F3-56.

2. Select Yes or No by using the control switches.

& How to get the source code using the open source

S03BP29 Free/Open Source Software Information

This product contains Free/Open Source Software (FOSS). The license information and/or the source code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL.

http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open- source/ivi/subaru/

Clock S03AF

For models with a SUBARU genuine navigation and/or audio system, the clock can be adjusted using either auto mode or manual mode. . Automode: automatic clock adjustment . Manual mode: manual clock adjust- ment

& Setting the clock manually S03AF03

! Type Amulti-function display (black and white)

S03AF0301 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

2. Press the button. 3. Select Settings.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Clock 3-61

3

(210,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

4. Select Vehicle. 5. Select Clock adjustment and then select Manual.

6. Press the + button or the button beside the clock.

! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis- play

S03AF030102

The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour display. Perform the following procedure to switch the display format. 1. Turn the ignition switch in the LOCK/ OFF position. 2. Press and hold the button located near the clock display for approximately 5 seconds. The clock display will then start to flash. 3. While the clock display is flashing, press and hold the + button for approxi- mately 2 seconds. The clock format will then change. 4. The clock display will continue to flash for approximately 3 seconds to indicate that the clock display has been changed.

! Type Bmulti-function display (color LCD)

S03AF0302 NOTE

When the combination meter display (color LCD) is displaying the menu screen entering screen, the system will notmove to the selection screen even if the INFO button is pressed and held. Before adjusting the clock, be sure to change the combination meter display (color LCD) to a screen other than the menu screen entering screen. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

Instruments and controls/Clock3-62

(211,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

2. Press the button. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Vehicle. 5. Select Clock adjustment and then select Manual.

1) INFO button

6. Press the INFO button on the steer- ing wheel to display the guidance screen.

7. While displaying the guidance screen, press and hold the INFO button on the steering wheel. The screen goes to the selection screen.

1) 2) /SET 3)

8. Pull the or switch to select the item.

9. Select Time/Date and pull the /SET CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Clock 3-63

3

(212,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

switch.

10. Select Time/Date and pull the /SET switch.

NOTE If Clock adjustment is not in manual mode, Time/Date cannot be selected. Be sure to perform steps 2 through 5.

11. Pull the , switches to scroll through to the items you can set.

(1) Use the / SET switch to choose the item you would like to change. (2) Pull the , switches to adjust the items.

12. Select Set and pull the /SETswitch to complete the clock setting. Select Go Back to return to the previous screen without saving settings.

NOTE The Birthday/Anniversary and mainte- nance reminder system function are based on the time and date on the multifunction display (color LCD).

& Setting the clock automati- cally

S03AF02 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

2. Press the button. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Vehicle. 5. Select Clock adjustment and then select Auto. 6. Press the button again to complete the setting.

! Models with navigation system S03AF0201

The clock will be set automatically where a GPS signal is available.

Instruments and controls/Clock3-64

(213,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Models without navigation system S03AF0202

The clock will be set and adjusted auto- matically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetooth for transferring phonebook data. 1. Register the smartphone to the audio system. For details, refer to Bluetooth SETTINGS in the supplemental Owners Manual for the audio/navigation system. 2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys- tem. For details, refer to Bluetooth SET- TINGS in the supplemental Owners Manual for the audio/navigation system. The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE Depending on the model of smart- phone, the settings of the connected smartphone may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or other models, notifica- tion settings may need to be activated.) For details, check the instructions on connecting smartphones.

& Regulatory information S03AF04

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Light control switch S03AH

& Precautions and tips S03AH06

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause the battery to discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the lights are turned off. If the vehicle is left unattended for a long time with the lights illuminated, the battery may be discharged.

Models with keyless access with push-button start system: The light control switch operates when the push-button ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the push-button ignition switch is turned off.

Models without keyless access with push-button start system: The light control switch operates when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE The light control switch can be oper- ated (except auto on/off headlights), even under the following conditions. . when the push-button ignition switch is turned off (models with key- less access with push-button start system) . when the key is not inserted into the ignition switch (models without key- less access with push-button start system)

When opening the drivers door with the headlights illuminated under such conditions, the chirp sound will inform the driver that the lights are illuminated.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-65

3

(214,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Headlights S03AH01

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever.

position Instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

position Instrument panel illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

position: auto on/off headlights (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side mar- ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.

position The headlights are all off.

NOTE The sensitivity of the auto on/off head- lights can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with a combination meter display (color LCD), the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to Vehicle Setting F3-40.

! Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights (modelswith auto on/off headlights)

S03AH0106 While the light control switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will auto- matically turn on when the windshield wipers operate several times. The head- lights will automatically turn off when the wipers stop.

NOTE TheON/OFF setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for de- tails.

! Welcome lighting function (if equipped)

S03AH0103 The welcome lighting function turns on the low beam headlight for smooth approach- ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in the AUTO position . It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/ off headlights

When approaching: While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will automatically illuminate when unlocking the doors and the rear gate (5-door models) by using the remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain illuminated for 30 seconds*1 and then turn off. However, if any of the following operations is done, the low beam head-

Instruments and controls/Light control switch3-66

(215,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

lights will turn off. . The doors are locked. . The light control switch is turned to a position other than AUTO. . The ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

When exiting: While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will remain illuminated even when either of the following operation is done. . The push-button ignition switch is turned to the OFF status (models with keyless access with push-button start system) . The key is pulled out from the ignition switch (models without keyless access with push-button start system)

The low beam headlights will turn off under any of the following conditions. . 3 minutes have passed since the low beam headlights were illuminated by the welcome lighting function. . 30 seconds have passed since the door is opened and closed.*1

. The light control switch is turned to a position other than AUTO.

. The locking procedure is performed twice. When performing the unlocking procedure after performing the locking procedure, perform the locking procedure twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which the low beam headlights remain on by the welcome lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de- tails.

! Sensor for the auto on/off head- lights (if equipped)

S03AH0101

The sensor is on the instrument panel as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the sensor, the sensor may not detect the level of the ambient light cor- rectly and the auto on/off headlights may not operate properly.

& High/low beam change (dimmer)

S03AH02

1) High beam 2) Low beam

When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the combination meter is also on.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-67

3

(216,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Headlight flasher S03AH03

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever.

When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the combination meter also illuminates.

& High beam assist function (if equipped)

S03AH07 NOTE . The high beam assist function uti- lizes the stereo camera installed at the position of the front map lights. . For details on how to handle the stereo camera, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the EyeSight system. The high beam assist function automati- cally changes the headlight from high beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to high beam. . When the vehicle speed increases to or above 20 mph (32 km/h). . There is no preceding or oncoming vehicle. . The forward area of the vehicle is dark. . The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions is met, the headlight will change to low beam. . When the vehicle speed decreases to or below 10 mph (16 km/h). . When the forward area of the vehicle is bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncoming vehicle. . When the EyeSight system is malfunc- tioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as operational. This setting can be changed to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

! How to use the high beam assist function

S03AH0701 The high beam assist function will be activated when all the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in the AUTO position and the low beam headlights are on automatically. . The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch3-68

(217,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

High beam assist indicator When the high beam assist function is activated, the high beam assist indicator light on the combination meter will illumi- nate.

NOTE If the high beam assist function is malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped, the headlight will be fixed at low beam.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi- tivity of the high beam assist func- tion

S03AH0704 The sensitivity of the high beam assist function can be lowered by performing the following operations. 1. Before turning the ignition switch to the ON position, set the light control switch to the AUTO position and push the signal lever forward (high beam position). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and within approximately 15 sec- onds, press the / (following distance setting) switch more than 10 times con- secutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam assist function is lowered, the EyeSight temporary stop indicator (White) on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE . The sensitivity of the high beam assist function cannot be lowered in the following conditions.

Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control is in operation The EyeSight warning indicator (yellow) is illuminated

. The sensitivity of the high beam assist function returns to normal level the next time the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position and the engine is restarted.

! How to change the headlight mode manually

S03AH0702 Change to the low beam: When you return the turn signal lever to the center position, the high beam assist function will turn off and the high beam assist indicator light will turn off.

Change to the high beam: When you turn the light control switch to the position, the headlight mode will be changed to the high beam. At this time, the high beam assist function will turn off, the high beam assist indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator light will turn on.

NOTE . After manually changing the head- light mode to the high beam, if you turn on the high beam assist function, return the light control switch to the AUTO position. . When manually changing the head- light mode to the high beam, if you turn the light control switch to the position, the instrument panel illumina-

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-69

3

(218,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

tion, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear sidemarker lights, tail lights and license plate lights will be on.

! Tips for the high beam assist sys- tem

S03AH0703 . The high beam assist function recog- nizes the conditions surrounding the ve- hicle based on the brightness of illumina- tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the headlight mode may switch in some situations that do not match to the drivers sense. . A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be detected. . Under the following situations, the high beam assist function may not work prop- erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode may continue although there are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such cases, change the headlight mode manually.

In bad weather (fog, snow, sand storm, heavy rain, etc.) When the windshield glass is dirty or fogged When the windshield is cracked or damaged

When the stereo camera is de- formed or the stereo camera lenses are dirty If there are lights similar to the headlights or the tail lights in the surrounding area When an oncoming vehicle or ve- hicle ahead is driven without its head- lights and tail lights on If the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the light beams are not aimed correctly When a rapid change of brightness continues while driving When driving on a road with many ups and downs or uneven surfaces When driving on a road with many curves When there are some objects that reflect light strongly, such as a road sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead When the rear part of the vehicle ahead, such as a container, reflects light strongly When the headlights of your vehicle are damaged or dirty When your vehicle is tilted, such as in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is being towed Immediately after the engine has started

. In the following conditions, the head- light mode will not be automatically chan- ged from the high beam to the low beam.

When your vehicle passes an on- coming vehicle suddenly in a blind curve When another vehicle passes in front of your vehicle When an oncoming vehicle or ve- hicle ahead comes in and out of view because of continuous curves, median strips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light of the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam automatically. . The headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam, or the low beam mode may continue, when affected by a street light, traffic signal, illumination of an advertisement board, or a reflective object such as a road sign and signboard. . The timing of the change of headlight mode may differ due to the following factors.

Color or brightness of the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead The headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are covered with mud, snow, etc.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch3-70

(219,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Movement and direction of an on- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead When the headlights of an oncom- ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead illuminate on only one side When the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is a motorcycle Conditions of a road (slope, curve, road surface, etc.) Number of passengers and weight of loaded cargo Limitation of the detection ability of the stereo camera

& Daytime running light system S03AH04

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are illuminated, the tail lights do not illuminate. When it becomes dark outside, turn the light switch to the position to illuminate the head- lights and tail lights. This will im- prove visibility and allow other dri- vers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati- cally illuminate when the following condi- tions are fulfilled. . The engine is running. . The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in the AUTO (if equipped), or off position. . For CVT models, the select lever is in a position other than the P position.

NOTE When the light switch is in the position, the instrument panel illumina- tion, front side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are also illumi- nated.

Steering Responsive Head- light (SRH) (if equipped)

S03BL

1) The target area of illumination when SRH is activated

2) The target area of illumination when SRH is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves the headlight beam to the left or right in accordance with the steering angle and the vehicle speed. This function helps to improve the visibility at night by illuminat- ing the road ahead at corners and inter- sections.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) 3-71

3

(220,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

SRH OFF switch You can turn the SRH function on or off by pressing the SRH OFF switch.

1) SRH OFF indicator

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina- tionmeter turns off when SRH is turned on.

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina- tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned off.

If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF indicator on the combination meter flashes when the ignition switch is in the ON position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE . If you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position with SRH turned off and then start the engine again, SRH will automatically turn on. . When you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, the SRH OFF indi- cator will illuminate and turn off after several seconds. . SRH only activates when the vehicle is traveling forward at the speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. . SRH may not activate when the shift lever (MT models) is selected in 1st gear.

Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)

S03AT

The LED headlights produce more light than conventional halogen headlights. When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and the headlight beams are angled upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle may experience glare. To prevent this, the automatic headlight beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the optimum height automatically depending on the load the vehicle is carrying.

Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)3-72

(221,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Fog light switch (if equipped) S03BA

1) Headlight switch 2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch is placed in the position while the headlights are in the following condition. . while the headlight switch is in the position . for models with the auto on/off head- lights, while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the low beam head- lights turn on automatically

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the switch back down to the position.

The indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate when the front fog lights are illuminated.

& Steering responsive fog lights system (if equipped)

S03BA03 The steering responsive fog lights system automatically turns the front fog light on and off based on the steering angle and vehicle speed when entering a curve or driving on curved roads. The system is intended to help prevent accidents by enabling better visibility of curves ahead and early recognition of any disabled vehicles or other obstacles.

The front fog light on the inside of a curve will turn on if all of the following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the position, or the light control switch is in the AUTO position and the low beam head- lights are turned on automatically . The fog light switch is in the position . The low beam mode is selected . The select lever is in the D position or the manual mode is selected. . The steering response fog lights sys- tem has not been deactivated . The operating conditions such as the steering angle and vehicle speed are met

The front fog lights on both sides will turn on as usual if all of the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in either of the following conditions.

in the position in the AUTO position and the low beam headlights turn on automatically

. The fog light switch is in the position . The low beam mode is selected

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Fog light switch 3-73

3

(222,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch

S03BA0301

Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch Press this switch to deactivate the steering responsive fog lights system. Press the switch again to activate the system.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator

S03BA0302

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indi- cator

This indicator appears when the steering responsive fog lights system is deacti- vated. This indicator disappears when the system is activated.

Turn signal lever S03AI

1) Right turn 2) Lane change right signal 3) Lane change left signal 4) Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The lever will return automatically to the neutral position when you release it.

Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever3-74

(223,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& One-touch lane changer S03AI01

To flash the turn signal and turn signal indicator light three times, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and immediately release it.

NOTE The operational/non-operational setting of the one-touch lane changers can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. For models with the combination meter display (color LCD), the setting can also be changed by operating the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to Vehicle Setting F3-40.

Wiper and washer S03AM

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the wind- shield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster. Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con- tinuously for more than 10 sec- onds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level fre- quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the blade rubbers and might cause the wiper motor to fail. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear win- dow, always use the windshield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that the blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blade rubbers frozen to the window glass could cause not only the blade rubbers to be damaged but also might cause thewipermotor to fail. If the blade rubbers are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper dei- cer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning on the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera- tion because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, this might cause the wiper motor to fail even if the wiper switch is turned off. I f this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF po- sition and clean thewindowglass to allow proper wiper operation.

. Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-75

3

(224,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Refer to Windshield washer fluid F11-30.

. Do not clean the blade rubbers with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This will cause deterioration of the blade rubbers.

NOTE . The windshield wiper motor is pro- tected against overloads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates continu- ously under an unusually heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor temporarily. If this happens, park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the wiper switch, and wait for approxi- mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will reset itself, and the wipers will again operate normally. . Clean your blade rubbers and win- dow glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Operate the windshield washer for at least 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate- rial on the windshield or the blade rubbers results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer sur- face of the windshield or rear window and the blade rubbers using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and blade rubbers with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with water. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the wiper blades (or blade rubbers) with new ones. For replace- ment instructions, refer to Replace- ment of wiper blades F11-31.

& Windshield wiper and washer switches

S03AM01 The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. ! Operating the wiper lever

S03AM0106

: Mist operation (for a single wipe) : Off : Intermittent operation : Low speed operation : High speed operation

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the lever up. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer3-76

(225,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Wiper intermittent time control S03AM0103

When the wiper switch is in the position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- ing interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted in several steps.

! Windshield washer S03AM0104

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper control lever toward you. The washer fluid sprays until you release the lever. The wipers operate while you pull the lever.

NOTE

Windshield washer fluid warning light

The windshield washer fluid warning light illuminates when the washer fluid level in the tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the warning light illumi- nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the refilling procedure, refer to Wind- shield washer fluid F11-30.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-77

3

(226,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Rear window wiper and washer switch (5-door mod- els)

S03AM02

: Washer operation (accompanied by wiper operation)

: Continuous operation : Intermittent operation : Off

: Washer operation (accompanied by wiper operation)

! Rear wiper S03AM0201

With the switch turned to the position, the rear wiper will operate intermittently at intervals corresponding to the vehicle speed. In this position, when you move the select lever to the R position (CVT

models) or the shift lever to the reverse position (MT models), the rear wiper will switch to continuous operation. When you move the select lever/shift lever from the R (reverse) position to another position, the rear wiper will return to intermittent operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper: Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off position, if the front windshield wiper is operating continuously, the rear wiper will operate intermittently when you move the select lever/shift lever to the R (reverse) position.

The factory setting (default setting) of the reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as follows. . U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational . Other models: Operational

This setting can be changed by aSUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs the rear wiper operation on the rear gate. Doing so may damage the rear wiper when it operates.

! Washer S03AM0202

To wash the rear window, turn the knob to the position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer3-78

(227,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Mirrors S03AP

Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.

& Inside mirror S03AP01

1) Normal position 2) Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use. To reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti- glare position.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com- pass (if equipped)

S03AP02

1) Display 2) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and auto- matically dims to eliminate the glare and preserve your vision. ! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture S03AP0205

Press the switch to turn the auto- dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switchs green LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming feature will default to on with each ignition cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature S03AP0206

1. To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default to on with each ignition cycle. 2. If the display reads C, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is cali- brated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance: (1) Find your current location and zone number on the map. (2) Press and hold the switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display. (3) Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the switch

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-79

3

(228,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop press- ing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direc- tion.

4. If the vehicles magnetics have chan- ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the switch for more than 9 seconds or until a C appears in the display. Once a C appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is cali- brated.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com- pass with HomeLink (if equipped)

S03AP07

1) Display 2) HomeLink Buttons 3) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and auto- matically dims to eliminate the glare and preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- ture

S03AP0705 Press the switch to turn the auto- dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switchs green LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming feature will default to on with each ignition cycle. ! To Operate the Compass Feature

S03AP0706 1. To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default to on with each ignition cycle. 2. If the display reads C, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is cali- brated.

Compass calibration zones

Instruments and controls/Mirrors3-80

(229,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

3. To adjust for compass zone variance: (1) Find your current location and zone number on the map. (2) Press and hold the switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display. (3) Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop press- ing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direc- tion.

4. If the vehicles magnetics have chan- ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the switch for more than 9 seconds or until a C appears in the display. Once a C appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is cali- brated.

! HomeLink Wireless Control Sys- tem

S03AP0704 The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink website. Addi- tional information and programming vi- deos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.

. When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar- age door opener model manufac- tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety stan- dards.

. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand- held remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training.

. Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ON or ACC position for pro- gramming and/or operation of HomeLink.

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar- age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink program- ming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to Erasing HomeLink But- tons F3-84.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-81

3

(230,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Programming a New HomeLink Button

S03AP070409

1) Indicator Light 2) HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink but- ton that you would like to program. The HomeLink indicator light will flash orange slowly (if not, refer to Erasing HomeLink Buttons F3-84).

1) Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button that you would like to program.

NOTE Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process.

3. While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and hold the hand- held remote button. Continue pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE Some devices may require you to re- place this Programming a New HomeLink Button step 3 with proce- dures noted in the Gate Operator / Canadian Programming section. Refer to Gate Operator / Canadian Program- ming F3-84.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors3-82

(231,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink button that you would like to program and observe the indicator light.

. If the indicator light remains constant green, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete. . If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for two sec- onds and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of the programming instructions.

1) Learn button

5. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the Learn, Smart, or Program button. This can usually be found where the hanging antennawire is attached to themotor-head unit (see the devices manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps. 6. Firmly press and release the Learn, Smart, or Program button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times. At this point programming is complete and your device should operate when theHomeLink button is pressed and released.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-83

3

(232,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next to the indicator light, please refer to Garage Door Two-Way Communication F3-85.

In the event that there are still program- ming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink web- site.

! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro- gramming

S03AP070410

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmis- sion, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are de- signed to time-out in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmit- ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the program- ming procedures, replace Programming a New HomeLink Button step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release (cy- cle) your devices hand-held remote every two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with Programming a New HomeLink Button step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink S03AP070411

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, secur- ity system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand- held remote of the device may also be used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink Buttons S03AP070412

To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed as outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED indicator will change from continuously lit to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with Programming a New HomeLink Button - step 1.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors3-84

(233,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

S03AP070406

To program a previously trained button, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink button can be released at this point. Proceed with Programming a New HomeLink Button - step 3. 3. If you do not complete the program- ming of a new device to the button, it will revert to the previously stored program- ming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu- nication

S03AP070413

HomeLink has the capability of commu- nicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display clos- ing or opening status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall and display the last recorded status commu- nicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being closed or opened.

HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu- nication

S03AP070414

1) Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLinks garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status in- dicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way Communication S03AP070415

1) Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink by simulta- neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for three seconds.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-85

3

(234,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) GarageDoor Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink- ing Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

If two-way communication programming is successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators.

! Certification S03AP070416

In the event that there are still program- ming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515. . U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de- vice may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora- tion.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors3-86

(235,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

WARNING

. When p r o g r amm i n g t h e HomeLink Wireless Control Sys- tem, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or da- mage.

. Do not use the HomeLink Wire- less Control System with a gar- age door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these fea- tures increases risk of serious injury or death. For more infor- mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

& Outside mirrors S03AP03

! Convex mirror (passenger side) S03AP0301

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flatmirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when chan- ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mirror.

! Remote control mirror switch S03AP0302

: Select side to adjust : Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. 1. Turn the control switch to the side that you want to adjust. L is for the left mirror, R is for the right mirror. 2. Move the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror. 3. Return the control switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional opera- tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- ally.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-87

3

(236,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Defogger and deicer (if equipped)

S03BI

1) Rear window defogger 2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped) 3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with the defogger and the deicer (if equipped) system. The defogger and deicer system is activated only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Climate control system type A 1) Models without outside mirror defogger 2) Models with outside mirror defogger

Climate control system type B and C 1) Models without outside mirror defogger 2) Models with outside mirror defogger

To activate simultaneously the rear win- dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (if equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if equipped), press the control switch that is located on the climate control panel. The indicator light on the control switch illumi- nates while the defogger and deicer system is activated.

To turn them off, press the control switch again. They also turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK/ OFF position.

The defogger and deicer system will automatically shut off after approximately 15 minutes. If the rear window and the

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer3-88

(237,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

outside mirrors have been cleared and the windshield blade rubbers have been deiced completely before that time, press the control switch to turn them off.

For climate control system (type B and C), it is possible for the defogger and deicer system to be set to continuous operation mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Also, for models with a combination meter display (color LCD), it is possible to set the defogger and deicer system for the con- tinuous operation mode. For details, refer to Vehicle Setting F3-40.

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger and deicer system con- tinuously for any longer than necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra- sives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may da- mage the conductors printed on the window.

NOTE . Turn on the defogger and deicer system if the wipers are frozen to the windshield. . If the windshield is covered with snow, remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effec- tively. . While the defogger and deicer sys- tem is in the continuous operation mode:

If the vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes, the windshield wiper dei- cer system automatically stops op- erating. However, the rear window defogger system and outside mirror defogger system maintain continu- ous operation in this condition. If the vehicle battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defog- ger system and deicer system is canceled and the system stops operating.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel S03BF

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/telescopic position while driv- ing. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in per- sonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the fixed position, adjust the steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in per- sonal injury.

CONTINUED

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 3-89

3

(238,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) Tilt adjustment 2) Telescopic adjustment 3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to Front seats F1-5. 2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level. 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down, and forward and backward.

& Heated Steering Wheel sys- tem (if equipped)

S03BF01 The Heated Steering Wheel system warms the steering wheel at the constant temperature.

1) Heated Steering Wheel switch 2) Indicator light 3) Heated area

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. Then the steering wheel will be warmed and the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the switch again. Then the indicator light will turn off.

CAUTION

. Use the Heated Steering Wheel system with the engine running. Otherwise, the battery voltage may drop below the permissible level and itmay not be possible to start the engine.

. There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low tempera- tures if they use the Heated Steering Wheel for a long period of time. When using the Heated SteeringWheel, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated Steering Wheel with an object such as a steering wheel cover. Doing so may cause the Heated Steering Wheel to overheat.

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel3-90

(239,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE . If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is approximately above 1048F (408C) when the Heated Steering Wheel system is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. Then, the indicator light will continue to illuminate. . The Heated Steering Wheel system will automatically turn off approxi- mately 30 minutes after the Heated Steering Wheel system has been turned on.

Horn S03AR

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Instruments and controls/Horn 3-91

3

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6 Left Page

(241,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S04 Ventilator control .................................................... 4-2

Center ventilators .................................................. 4-2 Side ventilators...................................................... 4-2

Climate control panel ............................................. 4-2 Type A ................................................................... 4-3 Type B ................................................................... 4-4 Type C ................................................................... 4-5

Automatic climate control operation (type B and C) ...................................................... 4-6 Sensors ................................................................. 4-7

Manual climate control operation.......................... 4-7 Airflow mode selection........................................... 4-7 MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) .......................... 4-8 Temperature control............................................... 4-9 Fan speed control .................................................. 4-9 Air conditioner control ........................................... 4-9 Air inlet selection................................................... 4-9 To turn off the climate control system ...................4-10

Defrosting.............................................................. 4-10 Operating tips for heater and air conditioner .....4-11

Cleaning ventilation grille ..................................... 4-11 Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight .... 4-11 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit................................................................ 4-11

Checking air conditioning system before summer season .............................................................. 4-11

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low temperature weather conditions................... 4-11

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded................................................ 4-11

Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-12 Air filtration system.............................................. 4-12

Replacing a cabin air filter .................................... 4-12

Climate control

4

(242,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Ventilator control S04AF

& Center ventilators S04AF01

Center ventilators To adjust the airflow direction, move the tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all the way down.

& Side ventilators S04AF02

Side ventilators 1) Close 2) Open

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

Climate control panel S04AG

WARNING

. The cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high en- ough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or ani- mals.

Climate control/Ventilator control4-2

(243,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Type A S04AG01

1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-7.)

2) Fan speed control dial (Refer to Fan speed control F4-9.)

3) Temperature control dial (Refer to Tem- perature control F4-9.)

4) Air conditioner button (Refer to Air conditioner control F4-9.)

5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air inlet selection F4-9.)

6) Rear window defogger button and mirror heater button (if equipped) (Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-88.)

CONTINUED

Climate control/Climate control panel 4-3

4

(244,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Type B S04AG02

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to Auto- matic climate control operation (type B and C) F4-6 and/or Temperature con- trol F4-9.)

2) AUTO button (Refer to Automatic cli- mate control operation (type B and C) F4-6.)

3) Air conditioner button (Refer to Air conditioner control F4-9.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air inlet selection F4-9.)

5) MAX A/C button (Refer to MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) F4-8.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to Defrosting F4-10.)

7) Rear window defogger button and mirror heater button (if equipped) (Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-88.)

8) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-7.)

9) Fan speed control dial (Refer to Fan speed control F4-9.)

10) ON/OFF button (Refer to Automatic climate control operation (type B and C) F4-6.)

NOTE The climate control screen is displayed on the multi-function display (color LCD). Refer to Climate control screen F3-49.

Climate control/Climate control panel4-4

(245,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Type C S04AG03

1) Drivers side temperature control dial (Refer to Automatic climate control operation (type B and C) F4-6 and/or Temperature control F4-9.)

2) AUTO button (Refer to Automatic cli- mate control operation (type B and C) F4-6.)

3) Air conditioner button (Refer to Air conditioner control F4-9.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to Air inlet selection F4-9.)

5) MAX A/C button (Refer to MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) F4-8.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to Defrosting F4-10.)

7) Rear window defogger button and mirror heater button (if equipped) (Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-88.)

8) Passengers side temperature control dial (Refer to Temperature control F4- 9.)

9) SYNC button (Refer to SYNC mode (type C) F4-9.)

10) Fan speed control dial (Refer to Fan speed control F4-9.)

11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to Airflow mode selection F4-7.)

12) ON/OFF button (Refer to Automatic climate control operation (type B and C) F4-6.)

CONTINUED

Climate control/Climate control panel 4-5

4

(246,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE The climate control screen is displayed on the multi-function display (color LCD). Refer to Climate control screen F3-49.

Automatic climate control operation (type B and C)

S04AI

When thismode is selected, the fan speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air conditioner compressor operation are automatically controlled. To activate this mode, perform the following. 1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator light FULL AUTO on the multi-function display (color LCD) illuminates. 2. Set the preferred temperature using the temperature control dial.

NOTE . Operate the automatic climate con- trol systemwhen the engine is running. . Even when cooling is not necessary, the air conditioner compressor will automatically turn on if the temperature is set much lower than the current outlet air temperature. Even in this case, the A/C indicator light on the control panel illuminates. . The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle. . If you operate any of the buttons on the control panel other than the ON/ OFF button, rear window defogger button, SYNC button and temperature control dial(s) during FULLAUTOmode

operation, the FULL indicator light on the multi-function display (color LCD) will turn off and the AUTO indicator light will remain illuminated. You can then manually control the system as desired using the button you operated. To change the system back to the FULL AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.

To turn off the climate control system, press the ON/OFF button. Then the air inlet selection will be set to the following. . When the air inlet selection is set to auto mode: Outside air circulation . When the air inlet selection is set to manual mode: No change

Climate control/Automatic climate control operation (type B and C)4-6

(247,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Sensors S04AI03

The sensors are located as follows.

1) Interior air temperature sensor 2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are not treated properly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior tempera- ture correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following precau- tions. . Do not subject the sensors to impact. . Keep water away from the sensors. . Do not cover the sensors.

Manual climate control op- eration

S04AJ

& Airflow mode selection S04AJ01

Select the airflow mode by using the airflow mode selection dial (type A and B) or the airflow mode selection button (type C).

Airflow modes are as follows.

(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

CONTINUED

Climate control/Manual climate control operation 4-7

4

(248,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

(Ventilation 2 for type B and C): Instru- ment panel outlets and foot outlets

(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of the instrument panel and some through windshield defroster outlets (A small amount of air flows to the windshield and both side windows to prevent fogging.)

(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel (Refer to Defrosting F4-10.)

(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel (Refer to Defrosting F4-10.)

& MAX A/C mode (for type B and C)

S04AJ06 For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C button. When the MAX A/C mode is on, the following settings will be changed auto- matically. . The air conditioner will turn on. . The temperature will be set on the lowest.

Climate control/Manual climate control operation4-8

(249,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. The fan speed will be set on the maximum speed. . The air inlet will be set to recirculation. . The air flow mode setting will be set to ventilation mode.

To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the previous setting, press the MAX A/C button again.

& Temperature control S04AJ02

Turn the temperature control dial to set the preferred interior temperature.

NOTE The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.

! SYNC mode (type C) S04AJ0207

When the SYNC mode is turned on, both the drivers and passengers side tem- peratures are synchronized using the drivers side temperature control dial. Press the SYNC button to turn on the SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator will illuminate. Press the SYNC button again or turn the passengers side temperature control dial to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator will not illuminate. In this case, temperature control on the drivers

side and passengers side is separate. The temperature will be controlled indivi- dually using the drivers and passengers temperature control dials.

& Fan speed control S04AJ03

Select the preferred fan speed by turning the fan speed control dial.

& Air conditioner control S04AJ04

The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running. Press the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the A/C indicator light illuminates. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again.

NOTE For efficient defogging or dehumidify- ing in cold weather, turn on the air conditioner. If the ambient temperature decreases to approximately 328F (08C), the air conditioner and dehumidifica- tion system may not operate properly.

& Air inlet selection S04AJ05

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet selection button.

. Recirculation: When the indicator light on the air inlet selection button illuminates, interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the air inlet selection button to the ON position for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving on a dusty road.

. Outside air circulation: When the indicator light on the air inlet selection button does not illuminate, out- side air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Press the air inlet selection button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable tem- perature and the road is no longer dusty.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi- tionmay fog up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside conditions are no longer dusty.

CONTINUED

Climate control/Manual climate control operation 4-9

4

(250,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& To turn off the climate control system

S04AJ07 To turn off the climate control system: . Type A: select the OFF position using the fan speed control dial. . Type B and C: press the ON/OFF button.

Defrosting S04AH

Select the or mode to defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door windows.

NOTE . When the or mode is selected, the air conditioner compres- sor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defrost the windshield more quickly. However the indicator on the air conditioner button will not illumi- nate. At the same time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to the outside air mode.

For type A climate control system, in this state:

You cannot stop the air condi- tioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button. You cannot select the recircula- tion mode by pressing the air inlet selection button.

. For types B and C climate control system, after defrosting the windshield by pressing the defroster button , pressing the button again returns the system to the setting that had been selected before the defroster was acti- vated.

Climate control/Defrosting4-10

(251,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

S04AD

& Cleaning ventilation grille S04AD01

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight

S04AD02 After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling effi- ciency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit

S04AD03 Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning system before summer sea- son

S04AD04 Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. Have the air con- ditioning system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tem- perature weather conditions

S04AD05 Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.

& Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded

S04AD06 To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air condi- tioner operation whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.

CONTINUED

Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner 4-11

4

(252,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Refrigerant for your climate control system

S04AD07 Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, themeth- od of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using thewrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system S04AE

Your vehicles air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system. Replace the cabin air filter according to the replacement schedule found in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. This schedule should be followed to maintain the filters dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter: . Reduction of the airflow through

the vents. . Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE The filter can influence the air condi- tioning, heating and defroster perfor- mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing a cabin air filter S04AE01

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE We recommend that you takemeasures to protect the center console with masking tape first, so that you avoid scratching the center console with the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the glove box.

Climate control/Air filtration system4-12

(253,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

(3) Push in the stoppers located on both sides of the glove box and then pull down the glove box as far as it will go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally and remove the hinge portion. When

doing this, be careful not to damage the hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according to the following procedure in order to prevent dust on the air cleaner from falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the filter cover. (2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm). (3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new one and then reinstall the cover.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must point UP.

CONTINUED

Climate control/Air filtration system 4-13

4

(254,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect the damper shaft. 5. Close the glove box.

Climate control/Air filtration system4-14

(257,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S05 Antenna ................................................................... 5-2

Roof antenna (for Rod type) ................................... 5-2 Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ........................... 5-2

Audio set ................................................................. 5-3

Audio

5

(258,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Antenna S05AA

& Roof antenna (for Rod type) S05AA03

CAUTION

. Be sure to remove the antenna rod before entering garages, parking towers and other loca- tions with low ceilings.

. Remove the antenna rod before washing your car at a car wash. If the antenna rod remains at- tached, it may scratch the roof.

. When reinstalling the removed antenna rod, be sure to fully tighten it.

1) Unscrew 2) Remove

The roof antenna is installed in the center at the rear part of the roof.

The antenna rod can be removed by unscrewing it from its base.

& Roof antenna (for Shark fin type)

S05AA04

The roof antenna is installed in the center of the roof at the rear.

Audio/Antenna5-2

(259,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Audio set S05AC

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system or audio system, refer to the separate navigation/ audio Owners Manual for details.

Audio/Audio set 5-3

5

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6 Left Page

(261,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S06 Interior lights........................................................... 6-2

Map lights.............................................................. 6-2 Dome light ............................................................. 6-2 Cargo area light (5-door models) ............................ 6-3 OFF delay timer ..................................................... 6-3

Sun visors ............................................................... 6-3 Sun visor extension plate (if equipped) .................. 6-4 Vanity mirror.......................................................... 6-4 Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ...................... 6-5

Storage compartment ............................................. 6-5 Glove box .............................................................. 6-5 Center console ...................................................... 6-6 Cup holders ........................................................... 6-6 Bottle holders ........................................................ 6-6

Accessory power outlets........................................ 6-7 Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) ............. 6-8

USB power supply.................................................. 6-9 Ashtray (dealer option) ........................................ 6-10 Floor mat ................................................................6-11 Coat hook.............................................................. 6-12 Shopping bag hook (5-door models) .................. 6-12 Cargo area cover (5-door models if equipped) ........................................................ 6-13 Using the cover .................................................... 6-13 To remove the cover housing................................ 6-13 Stowage of the cargo area cover........................... 6-14 To install the cover housing.................................. 6-14

Cargo tie-down hooks (5-door models if equipped) ........................................................ 6-15

Under-floor storage compartment (sedan if equipped) ........................................................ 6-15

Rear view camera ................................................. 6-16

Interior equipment

6

(262,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Interior lights S06AA

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lights are turned off to avoid battery discharge.

& Map lights S06AA06

1) Door interlock switch To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again.

! Automatic illumination S06AA0603

When the door interlock switch is in the DOOR position, the map lights illuminate automatically in the following cases. . Any of the doors other than the rear gate (if equipped) is opened. . The doors are unlocked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob F2-8. . The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry system. Refer to Remote keyless entry system F2-20. . The ignition switch is turned from the ACC position to the LOCK/OFF posi- tion.

& Dome light S06AA01

1) ON 2) DOOR 3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously. OFF: The light remains off. DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- matically in the following cases. . Any of the doors or the rear gate (5- door models) is opened. . The doors or the rear gate (5-door models) are unlocked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob F2-8.

Interior equipment/Interior lights6-2

(263,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. The doors or the rear gate (5-door models) are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter. Refer to Re- mote keyless entry system F2-20. . The ignition switch is turned from the ACC position to the LOCK/OFF posi- tion.

& Cargo area light (5-door models)

S06AA02

1) DOOR 2) OFF

DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear gate is opened. The light remains illumi- nated for several seconds and gradually turns off after the rear gate is closed. OFF: The light remains off.

& OFF delay timer S06AA07

The following lights have an automatic illumination function. . dome light . map light . cargo area light (5-door models)

When the interior light switch is set to the DOOR position, the light will automati- cally turn on and turn off depending on the locking and unlocking of the doors, the opening and closing of the doors, as well as the position of the ignition switch.

NOTE The setting for the period of time in which the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. For models with the combi- nation meter display (color LCD), the setting can also be changed by operat- ing the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to Vehi- cle Setting F3-40.

Sun visors S06AC

To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.

CONTINUED

Interior equipment/Sun visors 6-3

6

(264,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Sun visor extension plate (if equipped)

S06AC01

With the sun visor positioned over the side window, you can use the sun visor exten- sion plate to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. When you have finished using it, stow it by pushing it toward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate with the sun visor positioned over the windshield. The extension plate would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror S06AC03

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid being temporarily blinded by the glare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

Interior equipment/Sun visors6-4

(265,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Vanity mirror with light (if equipped)

S06AC02

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid being distracted by the light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. The light beside the vanity mirror illumi- nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE Use of the vanity mirror light for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

Storage compartment S06AD

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com- partment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart- ment.

& Glove box S06AD01

1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock. 2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-

lock.

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE . For models with the keyless access with push-button start system, use the emergency key to lock or unlock the glove box. . The emergency key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again.

CONTINUED

Interior equipment/Storage compartment 6-5

6

(266,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Center console S06AD02

The center console box provides a storage space.

1) Card holder

The top of the console can be used as an armrest.

& Cup holders S06AD16

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an acci- dent.

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev- erages, if hot, might scald you

and/or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage up- holstery or carpets.

. When a cup in the rear passen- gers cup holder contains a bev- erage, do not fold down the rear seatback. Otherwise, the bever- age could spill and, if the bev- erage is hot, it could scald you and/or your passengers.

Front passengers cup holder A dual cup holder is built into the center console.

Rear passengers cup holder (if equipped) A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

& Bottle holders S06AD17

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the bottle holder or put a bottle in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a bottle holder, make sure it is capped. Otherwise, the beverage could spill when opening/closing the door or while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could scald you and/or your passengers.

Interior equipment/Storage compartment6-6

(267,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The bottle holder equipped on each door trim can be used to hold beverage bottles and other items.

Accessory power outlets S06AF

Electrical power (12V DC) is available at any of the accessory power outlets when the ignition switch is in either the ACC or ON position. Accessory power outlets are located in the following places.

Power outlet below the climate control dials

Power outlet in the center console You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli- ance by connecting it to an outlet. The maximum power rating of an appli- ance that can be connected is 120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Al- ways put the cap on the acces- sory power outlet when it is not in use.

CONTINUED

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets 6-7

6

(268,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wat- tage for each outlet.

. When using appliances con- nected to two outlets simulta- neously, the total power con- sumed by them must not exceed 120W.Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adap- ters or more than one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli- ance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appliance will not

interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.

NOTE When the lid of the center console is closed, an opening remains between the center console and the lid to allow the power outlet in the center console to be used. Pass the cord of the electrical appliance through this open- ing.

& Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option)

S06AF01 To use the accessory power outlet as a cigarette lighter socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is available from your SUBARU dealer. The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. It will automatically spring up when ready for use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could also da- mage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket is originally designed to use a gen- uine SUBARU cigarette lighter plug. Do not use a non-genuine

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets6-8

(269,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

cigarette lighter plug in the sock- et. Doing so may cause a short- circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for a plug-in accessory such as a cell phone, that may damage the portion of the sockets internal mechanism that causes a cigar- ette lighter plug to pop out after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a cigar- ette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to power a plug-in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to stick and overheat, creating a potential fire hazard.

USB power supply S06AY

CAUTION

. The specification of a USB term- inal that can be used is the A- type. If a different specification of terminal is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible, or the device may mal- function.

. There is no guarantee even when a connected device malfunctions or data is damaged. The connec- tion of a device shall be per- formed at your responsibility.

. To avoid an electric shock or a malfunction, observe the follow- ing precautions. Do not connect a USB hub. Do not insert any metal or

other foreign object into the USB terminal.

Do not spill water or other liquid on the USB terminal.

. When you have connected a cable, pay attention not to pull on the connected cable with your legs. Otherwise, it may result in injury to you by falling over, or a

malfunction of the connected device.

. If a device is connected for a long time when the engine is not running, doing so may cause the risk of a discharged battery. Even when the engine is running, we recommend that you do not con- nect a device for an unnecessa- rily long time.

. Do not connect a malfunctioning device. Doing so may cause the risk of smoke and fire.

NOTE . The USB power supply is designed to supply amaximum rated power of DC 5V/2.1A or DC 5V/1A. Before connect- ing a device, be sure to read the instruction manual of the device and check whether or not this specification of the output is supported by the device. If a device that requires power exceeding the maximum rating is con- nected, power supply or charging may not be possible. Even if charging could be completed, the time required for charging may be longer than when the genuine charger for that device is used. . Depending on the device, charging may be possible only when a special

CONTINUED

Interior equipment/USB power supply 6-9

6

(270,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

cable is used. In this case, be sure to connect the device using the special cable. . When a device that communicates with a PC is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible. . When connect a device for charging, disconnect the device promptly after charging is completed.

2 terminal type USB power supply - DC 5V/2.1A* - Audio devices can be connected and

used.

*: The available electricity of the two USB terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A.

1 terminal type USB power supply - DC 5V/1A - Audio devices can be connected and

used

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position and a USB electronic device is connected to the USB terminal, DC 5V power can be supplied to the device. Use the USB terminal to use or charge an electronic device.

Ashtray (dealer option) S06AG

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Not doing so could result in a fire. . Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them into the ashtray, and then close the ashtray securely.

. Do not put flammable material in the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lighted cigarette in the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts in the ashtray.

NOTE Particles of ash and tobacco will accu- mulate around the hinges of the ash- trays inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended implement.

Interior equipment/Ashtray (dealer option)6-10

(271,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The portable ashtray can be installed in each cup holder or bottle holder. For the locations of the cup holders, refer to Cup holders F6-6. For the locations of the bottle holders, refer to Bottle holdersF6- 6.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Floor mat S06AJ

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident. Observe the following precautions to prevent the floor mat from slipping forward. . Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat or an equiva- lent designed with grommets in the correct locations.

. Make sure that the drivers floor mat is placed in its proper loca- tion and is correctly secured on its retaining pins.

. Do not use more than one floor mat.

Retaining pins are located on the drivers side floor. The floor mat should be properly secured using the built-in grommets, by placing the grommets over the pins and pushing them downward.

Interior equipment/Floor mat 6-11

6

(272,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Coat hook S06AH

A coat hook is attached to the rear passengers hand grip.

WARNING

Obey the following instructions. . Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks with- out using hangers.

. Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no pointed objects in the pock- ets.

If these instructions are ignored, the following may occur in sudden stops or in a collision. . serious injuries by the items

thrown through the cabin. . incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-

ployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat hook thatmight obstruct the drivers view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Shopping bag hook (5-door models)

S06AI

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area.

Interior equipment/Coat hook6-12

(273,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Cargo area cover (5-door models if equipped)

S06AK

The cargo area cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make room for additional cargo.

& Using the cover S06AK01

To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex- tended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stays while extending and re- winding the cover. Scratches on the stays could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.

& To remove the cover housing S06AK02

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the right side and shorten it. 3. Take it off the retainer.

CONTINUED

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (5-door models if equipped) 6-13

6

(274,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Stowage of the cargo area cover

S06AK04 The cargo area cover can be stowed in under the cargo floor.

1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo floor board.

2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo area end.

3. Put the cargo floor board back while hanging two retaining straps on the hooks that are located on the rear wall of cargo area.

& To install the cover housing S06AK05

The right end of the cargo area cover is a sliding structure.

1. Insert the right end of the cover into the recessed portion with the arrow mark facing upward. 2. Hold the cover housing securely and insert the left end of the cover into the recessed portion.

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (5-door models if equipped)6-14

(275,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Cargo tie-down hooks (5-door models if equipped)

S06AM

The cargo area is equipped with two or four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a cargo net or ropes. When using the front tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de- signed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that ex- ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10 kg) per hook.

Under-floor storage compart- ment (sedan if equipped)

S06AN

The storage compartments are located under the floor of the trunk. They can be used to store small items.

NOTE . The shape of the storage compart- mentmay be different depending on the model. . When storing a flat tire, put the storage tray in the trunk.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lids closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart- ment.

Interior equipment/Cargo tie-down hooks (5-door models if equipped) 6-15

6

(276,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Rear view camera S06AW

Refer to the separate navigation/audio Owners Manual.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera6-16

(279,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S07 Fuel .......................................................................... 7-3

Fuel requirements .................................................. 7-3 Fuel filler lid and cap ............................................. 7-4

State emission testing (U.S. only) ......................... 7-7 Preparing to drive ................................................... 7-8 Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) ..................... 7-9 Starting engine ...................................................... 7-9 Stopping the engine.............................................. 7-11

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)................................. 7-12 Safety precautions ................................................7-12 Operating range for push-button start system .......7-12 Starting engine .....................................................7-12 Stopping engine....................................................7-14 When access key fob does not operate properly ...7-14

Remote engine start system (dealer option) ...... 7-15 Remote engine starter transceiver (fob).................7-15 Alternate operation method for models with keyless access with push-button start system ..............................................................7-18

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start ........................................................7-18

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start shutdown....................................................7-19

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the vehicle................................................................7-19

Remote transmitter program (Remote engine starter transceiver)..............................................7-19

System maintenance.............................................7-19 Certification for remote engine starter ...................7-21

Manual transmission ............................................ 7-21 Shifting speeds .................................................... 7-22 Driving tips........................................................... 7-23

Continuously variable transmission ................... 7-23 Continuously variable transmission features......... 7-24 Select lever .......................................................... 7-25 Selection of manual mode (if equipped) ................ 7-26 Selection of L (if equipped)................................ 7-28 Shift lock function ................................................ 7-29 Driving tips........................................................... 7-30

Power steering...................................................... 7-30 Power steering warning light ................................ 7-30 Power steering system features ............................ 7-30

Braking .................................................................. 7-31 Braking tips.......................................................... 7-31 Brake system ....................................................... 7-32 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators................ 7-33

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)............................. 7-33 ABS self-check ..................................................... 7-34 ABS warning light................................................. 7-34

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system ................................................................ 7-34 Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions............. 7-34

Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...................... 7-35 Safety precautions................................................ 7-35 System features.................................................... 7-36 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor ............ 7-37 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................... 7-37

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 7-38

Starting and operating

7

(280,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Parking your vehicle............................................. 7-40 Parking brake .......................................................7-40 Parking tips ..........................................................7-40

Hill start assist system......................................... 7-42 To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist system................................................................7-43

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light ..............................................7-45

Cruise control (if equipped) ................................. 7-45 To set cruise control .............................................7-46 To temporarily cancel the cruise control................7-47 To turn off the cruise control.................................7-48 To change the cruising speed ...............................7-48

BSD/RCTA (if equipped) ....................................... 7-49 System features ....................................................7-50 System operation..................................................7-52 BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer ................................................................7-53

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ...................................... 7-55 BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................ 7-55 BSD/RCTA OFF switch.......................................... 7-56 Certification for the BSD/RCTA ............................. 7-57 Handling of radar sensors .................................... 7-58

Reverse Automatic Braking System (if equipped)....................................................... 7-59 Reverse Automatic Braking System overview........ 7-59 Operating conditions ............................................ 7-61 Reverse Automatic Braking System operation....... 7-63 Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system operation............................................... 7-66

Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF setting............................................................... 7-67

RAB warning indicator.......................................... 7-68 Handling of the sonar sensors .............................. 7-68

Starting and operating

(281,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Fuel S07AA

CAUTION

. Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause damage to the engine and/or fuel system.

. Some gas stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular octane gasoline with an octane rating below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of those fuels are not recom- mended.

& Fuel requirements S07AA01

The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. ! Mexico only

S07AA0121 Add a bottle of genuine SUBARU fuel additive to the fuel every 15,000 km (9,000 miles). Refer to an authorized SUBARU dealer for details. ! Fuel octane rating

S07AA0103 Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be

concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON S07AA010301

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

! AKI S07AA010302

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane num- bers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). ! Unleaded gasoline

S07AA0104 The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy. ! Reformulated gasoline

S07AA0128 SUBARU supports the use of reformulated gasoline when available. Reformulated gasoline has been blended to burn more cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions. ! MMT

S07AA0106 Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan- cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-

pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator light may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. ! Gasoline for cleaner air

S07AA0107 Your use of gasoline with detergent ad- ditives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should contain no more than 15% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Fuel 7-3

7

(282,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

more than 15%ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station op- erators if their gasolines contain deter- gents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following description. . Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual. . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- vents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- line before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer. . Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap S07AA02

! Locations of the fuel filler lid and the lid release lever

S07AA0202

Fuel filler lid 1) Sedan 2) 5-door models

Starting and operating/Fuel7-4

(283,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Fuel filler lid release lever 1) Sedan 2) 5-door models

! Refueling S07AA0201

Only one person should be involved in refueling. Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress. Be sure to observe any other precautions that are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position and turn off all the other electrical components. 2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid release lever up. The lever is on the floor at the left of the drivers seat.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap, first touch the vehicle body or a metal portion of the fuel pump or similar object to discharge any sta- tic electricity that may be present on your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is a possibility that an electric spark could ignite the fuel, which could burn you. To avoid acquiring a new static electric charge, do not get back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

1) Open 2) Close

3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam- mable. Before refueling, always turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position first and then close all vehicle doors and windows. Make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it firmly and turn it slowly to the left. Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck, especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for the sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Fuel 7-5

7

(284,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

4. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel nozzle securely into the fuel filler pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not fully inserted, its automatic stop- ping mechanism may not func- tion, causing fuel to overflow the tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto- matic stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle activates. If you con- tinue to add fuel, temperature changes or other conditions may cause fuel to overflow from the tank and create a fire hazard.

5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically stops. Do not add any more fuel. 6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

7. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE . You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle. . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may illuminate. Refer to CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- dicator light F3-16.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause da- mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel may leak out while the vehicle is being driven or fuel spillage could oc- cur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

Starting and operating/Fuel7-6

(285,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It could also lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your vehi- cle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance.

State emission testing (U.S. only)

S07AB

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer when testing an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model. Testing of an AWD model must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt- ing to do so will result in uncon- trolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem- ber to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited War- ranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states have Inspection/Maintenance programs to inspect your vehicles emission control system. If your vehicle does not pass this test, some states may deny renewal of your vehicles registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the performance of the engines emission control system. Certi- fied emission inspectors will inspect the On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as part of the state emission inspection process. The OBDII system is designed to detect engine and transmission pro- blems that might cause the vehicle emis- sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Colum- bia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system. . The inspection of the OBDII system consists of a visual operational check of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-7

7

(286,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

amination of the OBDII system with an electronic scan tool. . A vehicle passes the OBDII system inspection if proper operation of the CHECK ENGINE warning light is ob- served, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness monitors are all complete. . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if the CHECK ENGINE warning light is not properly operating (light is illuminated or is not working due to faulty LED [Light Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in the vehicles computer. . A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBDII system readiness monitors NOT READY is greater than one. If the vehicles battery has been recently re- placed or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for the emission test. Under this condition, the vehicle driver should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to reset the readiness monitors and return for an emission re-inspection. . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in their emission inspection program. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicles wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Prior to your vehicle being put on a dynamometer, tell your emission inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- sion damage will result. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emission testing program have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer. There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing program. When properly used, this equipment should not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected in an attempt to bypass AWD for state emission testing. An AWD vehicles must be tested using an AWD dynamometer with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

Preparing to drive S07AC

You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving. 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed. 2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper inflation. 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks. 4. Check that no small animals enter the engine compartment. 5. Check that the hood, trunk (sedan) and rear gate (5-door models) are fully closed. 6. Check the adjustment of the seat. 7. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors. 8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts. 9. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. 10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn- ing lights after starting the engine.

Starting and operating/Preparing to drive7-8

(287,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool- ing fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine.

NOTE Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.

Starting and stopping the en- gine (models without push- button start system)

S07BD

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than 10 sec- onds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10 seconds or more before trying again.

NOTE It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been discon- nected and reconnected (for mainte- nance or other purposes). This diffi- culty is caused by the electronically controlled throttles self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine.

& Starting engine S07BD01

! General precautions when starting engine

S07BD0105

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out- side the vehicle (except when using the remote engine start system). It may result in an acci- dent.

. Do not leave the engine running in locations with poor ventilation, such as a garage and indoors. The exhaust gas may enter the vehicle or indoors, and it may result in carbon monoxide poi- soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry foliage, paper, or other flammable substances. The exhaust pipe and exhaust emissions can cre- ate a fire hazard at high tempera- tures.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 7-9

7

(288,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during driving, the catalyst may over- heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure to sit in the drivers seat (except when using the remote engine start system).

NOTE . Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel- eration immediately after the engine has started. . Until the engine is warmed up suffi- ciently, the engine speed is maintained high. The engine speed will gradually drop as the engine warms up. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult to start the engine depending on the fuel used and the driving condition (repeated short trips when the engine is not warmed up sufficiently). In such a case, it is recommended to switch to a different brand of fuel. . On rare occasions, transient knock- ing may be heard from the engine when the accelerator is operated rapidly such as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel- eration. This is not a malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when the headlights, air conditioner and rear window defogger are turned off. . Do not shift the select lever (CVT models) or shift lever (MT models) while the starter is cranking.

! MT models S07BD0101

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- sories. 3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the floor. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and indicator F3-13. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started. If the engine does not start, try the following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that

the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the LOCK/ OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accel- erator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac- celerator pedal. (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the LOCK/ OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. (4) If the engine still fails to start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)7-10

(289,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! CVT models S07BD0104

1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- sories. 3. Shift the select lever to the P or N position (preferably the P position). The starter motor will only operate when the select lever is at the P or N position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and indicator F3-13. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the LOCK/ OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac- celerator pedal. (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the LOCK/ OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. (4) If the engine still refuses to start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up,make sure that the select lever is at the P or N position and that the parking brake is applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the select lever into the N position. Do not attempt to place the select lever of a moving vehicle into the P position.

& Stopping the engine S07BD02

The ignition switch should be turned off only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steer- ing and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental acti- vation of the LOCK/OFF posi- tion on the ignition switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 7-11

7

(290,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

S07BE

& Safety precautions S07BE06

Refer to Safety precautions F2-4.

& Operating range for push- button start system

S07BE01 Refer to Operating range for push-button start system F3-6.

& Starting engine S07BE03

WARNING

. There are some general precau- tions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in Starting engine F7-9.

. If the indicator on the push-but- ton ignition switch flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering is still locked, and it may result in an accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in orange, theremay be a malfunction with the vehicle. Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- diately.

. If the indicator on the push-but- ton ignition switch is flashing in green after the engine has started, it means that the steering is still locked. Depress the brake pedal while moving the steering wheel to the right and left, and press the push-button ignition switch.

. Do not continue pushing the push-button ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. Doing so could cause a malfunction. If the engine does not start, stop push- ing the push-button ignition switch. Instead, press the push- button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power status to OFF.Wait 10 seconds, and then push the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

NOTE . For a short time after the engine has started, the engine speed is kept high. When the warm-up is completed, the engine speed lowers automatically. . When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models), the engine starter operates for a maximum of 10 seconds and after starting the engine, the starter stops automatically. . When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models), the engine can be started regardless of the status of the push-button ignition switch. . If the security indicator light illumi- nates when you attempt to start the engine but the engine does not start, press the push-button ignition switch to switch the power to OFF and then try to start the engine again. . If the engine does not start, press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod- els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to switch the power to OFF. Then, while depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod- els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) more forcefully, press the push-button

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)7-12

(291,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

ignition switch. . The engine start proceduresmay not function depending on the radio wave conditions around the vehicle. In such a case, refer to Starting engine F9- 19. . If the vehicle battery is discharged, the steering cannot be unlocked. Charge the battery. . Do not shift the select lever (CVT models) or shift lever (MT models) while the starter is cranking.

1) Operation indicator 2) Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models), the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows.

! MT models S07BE0301

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the drivers seat. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Shift the shift lever in neutral. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Depress the clutch pedal until the indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. 6. While depressing the clutch pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE In case the engine does not start by the normal engine start procedure, move the shift lever to the neutral position, and switch the power to ACC. De- press the clutch pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch for at least 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency.

! CVT models S07BE0304

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the drivers seat. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Shift the select lever into the P position. The engine can also start when the select lever is in the N position,

however, for safety reasons, start in the P position. 4. Depress the brake pedal until the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. When starting with the select lever in the N position, the indicator does not turn green. 5. While depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE . While pressing the select lever but- ton in, the indicator on the push-button ignition switch will not turn green even when the select lever is in the P position. . In case the engine does not start by the normal engine start procedure, move the select lever to the P posi- tion, and switch the power to ACC. Depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch for at least 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-13

7

(292,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. When the engine is not started, the brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a case, depress the brake pedal more forcefully than usual. Check that the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green, and press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

& Stopping engine S07BE04

1. Stop the vehicle completely. 2. Move the select lever to the P position (CVT models). 3. Press the push-button ignition switch. The engine will stop, and the power will be switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button ignition switch during driving. When the push-button ignition switch is operated as follows, the engine will stop. The switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer.

The switch is pressed briefly 3 times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required on the brake pedal. The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving, do not operate the push-button ignition switch or open any of the doors until the vehicle is stopped in a safe location. It is dangerous because the steering lock may be activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

For CVT models . Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other than the P position.

. If the engine is stopped while the select lever is in a position other than the P position, the power will be in ACC. If the vehicle is left in this condition, the battery may be discharged.

NOTE Although you can stop the engine by operating the push-button ignition switch, do not stop the engine during driving except in an emergency.

& When access key fob does not operate properly

S07BE05 Refer to Access key fob if access key fob does not operate properly F9-18.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)7-14

(293,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

S07AZ

WARNING

. There are some general precau- tions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in General precau- tions when starting engine F7- 9.

. Donot remote start a vehicle in an enclosed environment (e.g. closed garage). Prolonged opera- tion of a motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful build-up of Carbon Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is harmful to your health. Exposure to high levels of Carbon Monox- ide can cause headaches, dizzi- ness or in extreme cases uncon- sciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle. In addition, the remote engine start system can activate the heater or air conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry. For more details, refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the re-

mote engine start system.

NOTE . The length of time for which it is acceptable to allow the engine to remain idling may be bound by local laws and regulations. Check the local rules when using the remote engine start system. . When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that you inform the service personnel that your vehicle is equipped with a remote engine start system.

& Remote engine starter trans- ceiver (fob)

S07AZ21

1) Fob button

! Starting the engine S07AZ2101

NOTE All vehicle doors (including rear gate/ trunk lid) and the engine hood must be closed prior to activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point will prevent starting or cause the engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is acti- vated by pressing the fob button on your remote engine starter transceiver (fob) twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within operating range of the system and the start request is received, the following phenom- ena will occur. . The fob flashes and beeps once. . The horn sounds once. . The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

If the fob is not within range (the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will indicate two long flashes without beeping.

The system will check certain safety preconditions before starting, and if all conditions are met, the engine will start within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, the following phenomena will occur. . The fob flashes and beeps twice. . The horn sounds once.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-15

7

(294,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote engine start system, the following phe- nomena will occur. . The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights remain illuminated. . The fob button flashes once every 3 seconds. . The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start (or starts and stalls) the remote engine start system will power off and then attempt to start the engine 3 additional times. The system will not attempt to restart the engine if it determines a vehicle malfunction is preventing starting. If the engine does not start after 3 additional attempts, the remote engine start request will be aborted. ! Stopping the engine

S07AZ2102 Press and hold the fob button for at least 2 seconds to stop the engine. The fob will flash and beep three times, indicating the engine has stopped. If the stop request is not received (for example, if the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will continue to flash once every 3 seconds. The system will automatically stop the engine after 15 minutes.

! Remote start safety features S07AZ2103

For safety and security reasons, the remote engine start system will prevent starting (or stop the engine if running) and sound the horn twice if any of the following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times. . The total run-time has exceeded 20 minutes . The brake pedal is depressed . A key is in the ignition switch . The engine hood is open . The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500 RPM . The security alarm is triggered . The select lever is not in the P position (CVT models)

If the system detects any door (including the rear gate/trunk lid) open during opera- tion, it will prevent starting or stop the engine, and sound the horn and flash side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the vehicles engine management system determines there is a safety risk due to a vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will power down and the horn will sound 3 times.

NOTE . If the alarm system is armed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is flashing), the alarm system will remain armed throughout the remote start run cycle. . If the alarm system is disarmed at the time of remote engine starter acti- vation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is not flashing), the alarm system will remain disarmed throughout the remote start run cycle.

! Remote start operation - fob con- firmation

S07AZ2104 Your remote engine starter fob is a bidirectional transceiver that can confirm system operation with several different visual and audible indications. The fobs LED-backlit button and internal piezo buzzer will indicate status of the system using the following flash and beep se- quences, provided the fob is within opera- tional range of the system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)7-16

(295,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Precondition Fob Indication

Meaning Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is held down The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully 1 flash every 3 sec Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started 2 long flashes Vehicle not in range (engine not started)

Engine idling by remote engine start operation 1 flash every 3 sec Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and holding fob button for at least 2 sec.

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request 1 flash every 3 sec Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-17

7

(296,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Alternate operation method for models with keyless ac- cess with push-button start system

S07AZ22

Access key fob 1) Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the remote engine start transmitter. Operate the lock button to start or stop the engine as follows. ! Before starting the engine

S07AZ2201 Before using the remote engine start system to start the engine, confirm the following conditions. . The select lever is in the P position (CVT models).

. All doors including the rear gate are closed. . The engine hood is closed. . The push-button ignition switch is in the OFF position. ! When starting the engine

S07AZ2202 To start the engine with remote engine start system, briefly press the lock button twice within 2 seconds, then press and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The hazard warning flashers then flash once and the keyless buzzer chirps once. 2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button briefly again. The hazard warning flashers then flash once again, and the keyless buzzer chirps once again. 3. After step 2, immediately press and hold the lock button. The hazard warning flashers then flash three times, and the horn will honk once. 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, release the lock button. The engine will then start successfully.

! When stopping the engine S07AZ2203

Press and hold the lock button to stop the engine with remote engine start system.

! Remote start safety features S07AZ2204

For details, refer to Remote start safety features F7-16. & Entering the vehiclewhile it is

running via remote start S07AZ03

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the keyless access function (if equipped) or remote keyless entry system. If the vehicles doors are unlocked manu- ally using the key, the vehicles alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to Alarm system F2-27.

. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position (models without keyless access with push- button start system) . Turn the push-button ignition switch to the ACC or ON position (models with keyless access with push-button start system) . Press any button on the access key fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle. 3. The engine will shut down when any door or trunk/rear gate is opened. 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)7-18

(297,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

and turn to the START position to restart the engine.

& Entering thevehicle following remote engine start shut- down

S07AZ10 An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is opened by the remote keyless entry transmitter within a few seconds immedi- ately following remote engine start shut- down.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the vehicle

S07AZ04 Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- perature controls to the desired setting and operation. After the system starts the engine, the heater or air conditioning will activate and heat or cool the interior to your setting.

& Remote transmitter program (Remote engine starter transceiver)

S07AZ13 New transmitters can be programmed to the remote engine start system in the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, damaged or additional transmitters are desired (the system will accept up to eight transmitters). New remote engine start transmitters can be programmed accord- ing to the following procedure. 1. Open the drivers door (the drivers door must remain opened throughout the entire process). 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON then LOCK/OFF, back to ON then LOCK/ OFF, back to ON then LOCK/OFF, then back to ON again and leave the ignition ON throughout the programming process. 4. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn three times, indicating that the system has entered the transmitter learn mode. 5. Press and release the button on the transmitter that you want to program. 6. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn one time, indicating that the

system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming, the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time. 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitters (the system will accept up to eight transmitters). 8. The system will exit the transmitter learn mode if the key is turned to the LOCK/OFF position, the door is closed or after 2 minutes.

& System maintenance S07AZ09

NOTE For remote engine starter transceiver: In the event that the vehicles battery is replaced, discharged or disconnected, it will be necessary to start the vehicle a minimum of one time using the key prior to activating the remote engine start system. This is required to allow the vehicle electronic systems to re- synchronize.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-19

7

(298,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Changing the battery S07AZ0901

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the re- mote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to touch the battery and any re- moved parts; children could swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if an incorrect replacement battery is used. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of bat- tery.

. Battery should not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

For models with keyless access with push-button start system: Perform the procedure described in Re- placing battery of access key fobF11-48. For remote engine starter transceiver: The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)

supplied in your remote engine start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage. When the battery begin to weaken, you will notice a decrease in range (distance from the vehicle that your remote control operates). Follow the instructions below to change the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo- cated on the back side lower left corner of the transmitter. 2. Carefully pry the remote engine start transmitter halves apart using a small flat- head screwdriver. 3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the battery and replace with new one. Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the old battery before removing it to ensure that the new battery is inserted properly (battery +

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)7-20

(299,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

should be pointed away from the transmit- ter circuit board on battery). 4. Carefully snap the case halves back together, reinstall the phillips screw and test the remote engine start system.

& Certification for remote en- gine starter

S07AZ23

! U.S.-spec. models S07AZ2301

CAUTION

FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de- vice may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

! Canada-spec. models S07AZ2302

Manual transmission S07AF

The manual transmission is a fully syn- chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re- verse-speed transmission. The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into reverse gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Manual transmission 7-21

7

(300,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

WARNING

. Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed) orwith the shift lever in the neutral position. Engine braking has no effect in either of these condi- tions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.

. Do not engage the clutch (i.e., release the clutch pedal) sud- denly when starting the vehicle. By doing so the vehicle might unexpectedly accelerate or the transmission could malfunction.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely stopped. It may cause damage to the transmis- sion to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving.

& Shifting speeds S07AF01

! Recommended shifting speeds S07AF0101

The best compromise between fuel econ- omy and vehicle performance during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24) 2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64) 4th to 5th 45 (72)

! Maximum allowable speeds S07AF0102

The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear. The tachometers needle will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. With the exception of cases where sudden acceleration is required, the vehicle should not be driven with the tachometers needle inside the red area. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy.

Gear mph (km/h) 1st 28 (46)

2nd 53 (85)

3rd 77 (124) 4th Legal speed limit

(Posted limit speed)5th

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Al- lowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a conse- quence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.

NOTE Never exceed the posted speed limit.

Starting and operating/Manual transmission7-22

(301,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Driving tips S07AF02

NOTE If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction. Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an upgrade. Either of those actions may cause clutch damage. Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life. In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you ride (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon is not an indication of a problem in your vehicle.

Continuously variable trans- mission

S07BG

WARNING

Do not shift from the P or N position into the D or R position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Observe the following precau- tions. Otherwise, the transmis- sion could be damaged. Shift into the P or R posi-

tion only after the vehicle has completely stopped.

Do not shift from the D position into the R position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped.

. Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-23

7

(302,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Never move the vehicle as fol- lows. Doing so may result in an unexpected accident or malfunc- tion. Moving rearward by inertia

with the select lever set in a forward driving position.

Moving forward by inertia with the select lever set in the R position.

. When parking the vehicle, first securely apply the parking brake and then place the select lever in the P position. Do not park for a long time with the select lever in any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.

& Continuously variable trans- mission features

S07BG06 The continuously variable transmission is electronically controlled and provides an infinite number of forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. For some models, it also has a manual mode or an L position.

NOTE . When the engine coolant tempera- ture is still low, the transmission will upshift or downshift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant tempera- ture is sufficiently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed up. . Immediately after transmission fluid is replaced, you may feel that the transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of data which the on-board computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while. . When driving a CVT model under continuous heavy load conditions such as when climbing a long, steep hill, the

engine speed or the vehicle speed may automatically be reduced. This is not a malfunction. This phenomenon results from the engine control function main- taining the cooling performance of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed will return to a normal speed when the engine is able to maintain the optimum cooling performance after the heavy load decreases. Driving under a heavy load must be performed with extreme care. Do not try to pass a vehicle in front when driving on an uphill slope while under heavy load conditions. . The continuously variable transmis- sion is a chain type system that pro- vides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At times, depending on varying driving condi- tions, a chain operating sound may be heard that is characteristic of this type of system.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission7-24

(303,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Select lever S07BG01

! Select lever positions S07BG0105

1) Select lever button

1) Models with L position 2) Models with manual mode

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the select lever button in. : Shift while pressing the select lever button in. : Shift without pressing the select lever button.

The select lever has four positions, P, R, N, D and it also has an L or M gate.

NOTE For some models, to protect the engine while the select lever is in the P or N position, the engine is controlled so that the engine speed may not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

! P (Park) S07BG0101

This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the parking brake firmly, then shift into the P position. Do not hold the vehicle with only themechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the P position to any other position, you should

depress the brake pedal fully then move the select lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started. ! R (Reverse)

S07BG0102 This position is for backing the vehicle. To shift from the N to R position, stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to the R position while pressing the select lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned to the LOCK/OFF position, movement of the select lever from the N to R position is possible for a limited time period by depressing the brake pedal, and then it becomes impossible. For details, refer to Shift lock function F7-29. ! N (Neutral)

S07BG0103 This position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position, the transmission is neutral, meaning that the wheels and transmission are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is applied.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-25

7

(304,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the select lever in the N (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently in- creased.

NOTE If the select lever is in the N position when you stop the engine for parking, you may not subsequently be able to move it to the R and P positions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. You will then be able to move the select lever to the P position.

! D (Drive) S07BG0104

This position is for normal driving. The transmission shifts automatically and con- tinuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. Also, while driving up and down a hill, the transmission assists and controls the driving performance and engine brak- ing while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in D position, depress the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift. In this case, the transmission will operate like a conventional automatic transmis- sion. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.

Formodels withmanual mode, if one of the shift paddles behind the steering wheel is operated while driving in the D position, the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. In this mode, you can shift into any gear position using the shift paddles. For details about the manual mode, refer to Selection of manual mode F7-26. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission will switch from the manual mode back to the D position for normal driving.

& Selection of manual mode (if equipped)

S07BG02

With the vehicle either moving or station- ary, move the select lever from the D position to the M position to select the manual mode.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission7-26

(305,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Type A 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Gear position indicator

Type B 1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indica- tor and/or downshift indicator on the combination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-7th- gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear shift is possible. When the upshift indicator illuminates, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator illuminates, downshifting is possible. When both in- dicators illuminate, upshifting and down- shifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals) the gear will be automatically shifted to the 1st position and the down- shift indicator will turn off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position, pull the shift paddle that has + indicated on it. To downshift to the next lower gear position, pull the shift paddle that has indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the select lever to the D position from the M position.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-27

7

(306,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

Donot place or hang anything on the shift paddles. Doing somay result in accidental gear shifting.

NOTE Please read the following points care- fully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode. . If you attempt to shift downwhen the engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down- shift is not possible. . If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- sion will not respond. . You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the shift paddle twice in rapid succes- sion. . The transmission automatically se- lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving. . If the temperature of the transmis- sion fluid becomes too high, the AT OIL TEMP warning light on the combi- nation meter will illuminate. Immedi- ately stop the vehicle in a safe location

and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off.

& Selection of L (if equipped) S07BG03

L is for using engine braking when going down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move the select lever from the D position to the L position.

When selected, the indicator L will illuminate on the combination meter.

To deselect L, move the select lever to the D position.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission7-28

(307,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Shift lock function S07BG04

The shift lock function helps prevent the improper operation of the select lever. . The select lever cannot be operated unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed. . The select lever cannot be moved from the P position to any other position before the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the brake pedal first, and then operate the select lever. . Only the P position allows you to turn the ignition switch from the ACC position to the LOCK/OFF position and remove the key from the ignition switch. . If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position while the select lever is in the N position, the select lever may not be moved to the P position after a period of time. Therefore, move the select lever to the P position with the brake pedal depressed soon after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/ OFF position.

! Shift lock release S07BG0401

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn the ignition switch back to the ON position then move the select lever to the P position with the select lever button pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, perform the following steps. . When the select lever cannot be shifted from P to N: Refer to Shift lock release using the shift lock release button F7-29. . When the select lever cannot be shifted from N to R, P: Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, move the select lever to the P position with the select lever button pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure, the shift lock system (or the vehicle control system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, refer to Shift lock release using the shift lock release button F7-29.

! Shift lock release using the shift lock release button

S07BG0402 Perform the following procedure to release the shift lock. 1. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF posi- tion.

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock release button is located under the shift lock cover.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-29

7

(308,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

3. Remove the grip portion of the screw- driver.

4. While depressing the brake pedal, insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it right and left while pushing the shift lock release button using a screwdriver, and

then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, the shift lock system may be malfunctioning. Con- tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible. & Driving tips

S07BG05

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the D or R position. . Always apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmission. . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D position. Use the brake instead. . The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.

Power steering S07AJ

& Power steering warning light S07AJ10

& Power steering system fea- tures

S07AJ11 The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the power steering warning light on the com- bination meter illuminates to inform the driver that the warning system is function- ing properly. Then, if the engine started, the warning light turns off to inform the driver that the steering power assist is operational.

Starting and operating/Power steering7-30

(309,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immedi- ately.

NOTE If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the con- trol computer and drive motor, from overheating. . The steering wheel is operated fre- quently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turn- ing the steering wheel during parallel parking. . The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.

At this time, there will be more resis- tance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in a non-standard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too frequently, this may result in a malfunction of the power steering control system.

Braking S07AK

& Braking tips S07AK01

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet S07AK0101

When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speedwhile lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ! Use of engine braking

S07AK0102 Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descend- ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Braking 7-31

7

(310,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Braking when a tire is punctured S07AK0103

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe location.

& Brake system S07AK02

! Two separate circuits S07AK0201

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle. ! Brake booster

S07AK0202 The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power. The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, you will have to depress the pedal much harder than

during normal braking, and the braking distance will increase. ! Supplemental booster function

when vacuum pressure fails S07AK0205

While the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is running, the supple- mental booster function operates when the brake booster performance is decreased due to insufficient vacuum boost. When the brake pedal is depressed while the supplemental booster function is oper- ating, an operation sound and brake pedal vibration may be generated. This is not a malfunction. ! Brake assist system

S07AK0203

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the brake assist. It is not a system that brings more braking ability to the vehicle beyond its braking capabil- ity. Always use the utmost care when driving regarding vehicle speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly, continue depressing the brake pedal strongly to bring the effect of the brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the driver cannot depress the brake pedal strongly and the brake power is insufficient. Brake assist generates the brake power according to the speed at which the driver depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE When you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following phenomena occur. However, even though these occur, they do not indi- cate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly. . Youmight feel that the brake pedal is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force. . You might hear an ABS operating noise from the engine compartment.

Starting and operating/Braking7-32

(311,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Disc brake pad wear warning indicators

S07AK03

The disc brake pad wear warning indica- tors on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, im- mediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

S07AL

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv- ing overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the ABS could easily lead to a serious acci- dent.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de- crease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe following distance from other vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be long- er for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, re- duce your speed and leave ample distance from other vehicles.

. When tire chains are installed, stopping distances may be long- er for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. Be sure to reduce your speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.

. When you feel the ABS operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the opera- tion of the ABS.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-33

7

(312,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& ABS self-check S07AL01

Just after the vehicle is started, you may feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar to when the ABS operates, and you may also hear the sound of the ABS working from the engine compartment. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS being carried out and does not indicate a malfunction.

& ABS warning light S07AL02

Refer to ABS warning light F3-20.

Electronic Brake Force Dis- tribution (EBD) system

S07AM

The EBD system maximizes the effective- ness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicles loading condition and speed. The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS and uses some of the ABS compo- nents to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD system malfunction, the EBD system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions

S07AM01

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stopsworking and the following warning lights illuminate simultaneously. . Brake system warning light . ABS warning light . Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if all the warning lights illuminate simulta- neously during driving. Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the conventional braking system will still func- tion. However, the rear wheels will bemore prone to locking when the brakes are applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control.

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system7-34

(313,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

If all the warning lights illuminate simulta- neously, take the following steps. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat location. 2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the engine. 3. Restart the engine. 4. Release the parking brake.

If all the warning lights do not come back on: The EBD system have a possible malfunc- tion. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

If all the warning lights stay illuminated or come back on after approximately 2 seconds: 1. Turn off the engine again. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Check the brake fluid level. For details about checking the brake fluid level, refer to Checking the fluid level F11-15.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dan- gerous. This indicates your brake systemmay not be working prop- erly. If the light remains illumi- nated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immedi- ately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

S07AN

& Safety precautions S07AN05

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv- ing overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system could ea- sily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control system, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-cov- ered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system is an indication that the road being travelled on has a slippery sur- face; since having Vehicle Dy-

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-35

7

(314,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

namics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo- nents, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have an inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system is operating properly: All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Further- more, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.

Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door pillar.

Use only the specified tempor- ary spare tire to replace a flat tire. With a temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.

. If non-matching tires are used, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may not operate cor- rectly.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power. Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem unless it is absolutely neces- sary. If you must turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem, drive very carefully accord- ing to the road surface condi- tions.

& System features S07AN06

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system adjusts the engines output and the wheels respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is shown by flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Acti- vation of this function is shown by flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

NOTE . The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.

Slight twitching of the brake pedal is felt. The vehicle or steering wheel shakes to a small degree. An operating sound from the engine compartment is heard briefly when starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine.

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system7-36

(315,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The brake pedal seems to jolt when driving off after starting the engine.

. In the circumstances shown in the following list, the vehicle may be less stable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control System may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system malfunction.

on gravel-covered or rutted roads on unfinished roads when the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for normal conditions. . It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. . Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire. Failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor

S07AN01 Refer to Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- tion indicator light F3-24 and Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator lightF3- 25.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

S07AN02

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Creating adequate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may help to recover from the loss of traction. Use the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as

necessary. . a standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface . extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

When the switch is pressed during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle will behave like a model not equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system. When the switch is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-37

7

(316,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Control OFF indicator light turns off. With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system deactivated, traction and stability en- hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. Therefore you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under above-mentioned situations.

NOTE . When the switch has been pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reacti- vates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position and the engine is restarted. . If the switch is held down for 30 seconds or longer, the indicator light turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is activated, and the system ignores any further pressing of the switch. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position and restart the engine. . When the switch is pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system, the vehicles running per- formance is comparable with that of a vehicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except when absolutely neces- sary. . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, compo- nents of the brake control system may still activate. When the brake control system is activated, the Vehicle Dy- namics Control operation indicator light flashes.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

S07AO

Low tire pressure warning light The tire pressure monitoring system pro- vides the driver with a warning message when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)7-38

(317,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and ser- ious personal injury could occur. (1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe location.

(3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the drivers side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures in- crease accordingly. Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly be- fore adjusting their pressures to the standard values shownon the tire placard. Refer to Tires and wheels F11-21. The tire pres- sure monitoring system does not

function when the vehicle is sta- tionary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few min- utes later. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have signifi- cant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/trans- mitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or sys- tem resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sea- lant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possi- ble. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if the sealant residue is properly cleaned off. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for ap- p rox ima t e l y one m inu t e , promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system in- spected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal parts in the trunk. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) 7-39

7

(318,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

FCC ID: CWTD1G049

NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de- vice may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equip- ment.

Parking your vehicle S07AP

& Parking brake S07AP01

To set the parking brake, depress the brake pedal firmly and hold it down until the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.

To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release button, then lower the lever while keeping the button pressed. When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking brake warning light illuminates. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has turned off before the vehicle is driven. Refer to Brake system warning light (red) F3-21.

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause un- necessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive, always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.

& Parking tips S07AP02

When parking your vehicle, always per- form the following items. . Apply the parking brake firmly. . For MTmodels, put the shift lever in the 1 (1st) for upgrade or R (Reverse) for a downgrade. . For CVT models, put the select lever in the P (Park) position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle7-40

(319,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent op- eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the tempera- ture in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as theymay burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust sys- tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passen- ger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a front under- spoiler (optional), pay attention to blocks and other obstructions on the ground when parking. The un- derspoiler could be damaged by contact with them.

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle 7-41

7

(320,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Hill start assist system S07AU

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is a device only for helping the driver to START the vehicle on an uphill grade. To prevent accidents when the vehicle is parked on a slope, be sure to firmly set the parking brake. When setting the parking brake, make sure that the vehicle remains stationary when the clutch pedal (MT models) and brake pedal (both MT and CVT models) are released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position while the Hill start assist system is operating. The Hill start assist system will be deactivated and may lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to make the following vehicle operations easier. 1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT

models) B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)

In both these cases, the Hill start assist system operates under the following con- ditions. . when the clutch pedal is depressed while the brake pedal is also depressed (MT models) . when the vehicle has stopped with the brake pedal depressed (CVT models)

Braking power is maintained temporarily (for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill start assist system after the brake pedal is released. The driver is therefore able to start the vehicle in the same way as on a level grade, just using the clutch pedal (MT models only) and accelerator pedal (all models).

If the braking power of the Hill start assist system is insufficient after the brake pedal is released, apply more braking power by depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill start assist system does not operate in the following cases.

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system7-42

(321,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. when starting backward facing uphill

. when starting forward facing downhill

. while the parking brake is applied

. while the ignition switch is in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position . while the Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator light is illuminated. Refer to Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light F3-22.

When using the Hill start assist system, a braking effect may be felt even after the brake pedal has been released. However, for MT models, this braking effect should disappear once the clutch pedal is re- leased.

NOTE A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle begins to move forward after being reversed.

& To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist system

S07AU02

Hill start assist OFF indicator

CAUTION

When starting on an up hill grade, make sure the Hill start assist OFF indicator light is off. If the Hill start assist OFF indicator light is on, make sure the parking brake is applied.

To activate and deactivate the Hill start assist system, perform the following steps.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-43

7

(322,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE If you make an error when performing any steps in the following procedure, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/ OFF position once and then start over again.

! To deactivate S07AU0201

1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe location and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. 3. Restart the engine.

4. Confirm the following items. (1) The brake system warning light illuminates. (2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light turns off.

(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. (4) The ABS warning light turns off.

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

5. Press and hold the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch for 30 seconds until the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica- tor light on the combination meter turns on and off. 6. Within 5 seconds, release the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.

Hill start assist OFF indicator

7. Within 2 seconds, press back the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch. The Hill start assist OFF indicator light turns on and off. 8. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. Hill start assist is deacti- vated.

NOTE When the Hill start assist system is deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF indicator light illuminates.

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system7-44

(323,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! To reactivate S07AU0202

To reactivate Hill start assist system, repeat steps 1 to 8. When the Hill start assist system is activated, the Hill start assist OFF indicator light turns off. & Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator light

S07AU01 Refer to Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator light F3-22.

Cruise control (if equipped) S07AQ

NOTE For models with the EyeSight system: Refer to the Owners Manual supple- ment for the EyeSight system. Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

WARNING

. Do not use the cruise control under any of the following condi- tions. These may cause loss of vehicle control. driving up or down a steep

grade driving on slippery or winding

roads driving in heavy traffic

. When using the cruise control, always set the speed appropri- ately according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, and other conditions.

NOTE Make sure the cruise control system is turned off when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unintentionally setting of the cruise control.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-45

7

(324,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& To set cruise control S07AQ01

Cruise control main button

1. Press the cruise control main button.

Cruise control indicator light (type A)

Cruise control indicator light (type B) The cruise control indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate. 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the RES/SET switch to the

SET side and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.

NOTE When setting a cruise speed for the first time during a drive, both SET and RES may be used to set the initial cruise speed.

Cruise control set indicator light (type A) 1) When setting the displayed unit as

MPH. 2) When setting the displayed unit as

km/h.

Starting and operating/Cruise control7-46

(325,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Cruise control set indicator light (type B) 1) When setting the displayed unit as

MPH. 2) When setting the displayed unit as

km/h.

At this time, the cruise control set indicator light is illuminated in the combination meter. The set speed will be shown on the combination meter. You can change the displayed unit by operating the combi- nation meter display.

. For type A meter details, refer to Combination meter settings F3-11. . For type B meter details, refer to Screen Settings F3-39.

The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise control activated. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- leased, the vehicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel the cruise control

S07AQ02 The cruise control can be temporarily canceled in the following ways.

. Press the CANCEL button.

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models only).

WARNING

For CVT models, you can cancel the cruise control by shifting the select lever into the N position. However, do not shift the lever into the N position while driving except in case of emergency. If the select lever is shifted into the N position, the engine brake will no longer work. This could result in an accident.

The cruise control set indicator light in the combination meter turns off when the cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled and with vehi- cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more, press the RES/SET

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-47

7

(326,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

switch to the RES side to return to the original cruising speed automatically. The cruise control set indicator light in the combination meter will automatically illu- minate at this time.

& To turn off the cruise control S07AQ03

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: . Press the cruise control main button again. . Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK/OFF position (but only when the vehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed S07AQ04

! To increase the speed (by the RES/ SET switch)

S07AQ0405

Press the RES/SET switch to the RES side and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.

When setting the displayed unit as MPH: The set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the RES/ SET switch to the RES side.

When setting the displayed unit as km/h: The set speed can be increased 1 km/h each time by pressing the RES/SET switch to the RES side. ! To increase the speed (by accelera-

tor pedal) S07AQ0402

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac- celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Press the RES/SET switch to the SET side once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Starting and operating/Cruise control7-48

(327,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Todecrease the speed (by the RES/ SET switch)

S07AQ0406

Press the RES/SET switch to the SET side and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.

When setting the displayed unit as MPH: The set speed can be decreased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the RES/ SET switch to the SET side.

When setting the displayed unit as km/h: The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h each time by pressing the RES/SET switch to the SET side.

BSD/RCTA (if equipped) S07BM

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to detect objects or vehicles to the rear, drawing attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle. The system is designed to assist the driver in changing lanes or rever- sing safely by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle. How- ever, you cannot rely on this system alone in assuring the safety during a lane change or reversing. Overcon- fidence in this system could result in an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limitations, the flashing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may be delayed or it may not operate

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA 7-49

7

(328,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

at all even when a vehicle is present in a neighboring lane or approach- ing from either side. The driver is responsible for paying attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.

& System features S07BM01

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func- tions. . To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind Spot Detection) . To detect a vehicle approaching from the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the above functions.

NOTE The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by the radio wave related laws of the U.S. and Canada.When driving in other countries, certification of the country where the vehicle is driven must be obtained. For certification in the U.S. and Canada, refer to Certifica- tion for the BSD/RCTA F7-57.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD) S07BM0101

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as follows.

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. If the system detects a vehicle existing in the blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will illuminate. . If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator light will flash.

! Lane Change Assist (LCA) S07BM010101

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as follows. . If the system detects a vehicle ap- proaching at a high speed in the neighbor- ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will illuminate.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA7-50

(329,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi- cator light will flash. ! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

S07BM0103

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when driving in reverse. This feature helps the driver check the rear and side areas of the vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach- ing from either side while moving back- ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the following way.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes. . A warning buzzer sounds. . An icon appears on the rear view camera screen (audio/navigation monitor)

! Limitations of the detectability of RCTA

S07BM010301

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, the RCTA may not operate properly in angled parking.

Example 1 1) The detection range of the radar sensors 2) Area out of detection range of the radar

sensors A) Vehicle that may not be detected B) Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not be detected because the detection range is limited by the parked vehi- cle (B). Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

Example 2 1) The detection range of the radar sensors C) Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE The system may detect that a vehicle (C) is passing in front of your vehicle. Always be sure to check the surround- ings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA 7-51

7

(330,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& System operation S07BM02

! Operating conditions S07BM0201

The BSD/RCTAwill operate when all of the following conditions are met. . The ignition switch is in the ON position. . The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off. . The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7 mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing). . The shift lever/select lever is in the R position (when reversing).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the following situations. . The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on. . The vehicle speed is below 7 mph (12 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator remains off (except when rever- sing).

NOTE . In the following case, the BSD/RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will appear. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

When amalfunction occurs in the system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. In the following cases, the BSD/ RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and the BSD/ RCTA OFF indicator will appear.

When the radar sensor becomes significantly misaligned (If the or- ientation of the radar sensor is shifted for any reason, readjust- ment is required. Have the sensor adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) When a large amount of snow or ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- face around the radar sensors When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an envir- onment in which there are no ob- jects around (such as in a desert) for a long time When the temperature around the radar sensors increased exces- sively due to long driving on uphill grades in summer, etc. When the temperature around the radar sensors becomes extremely low When the vehicle battery voltage lowers When the vehicle battery be- comes overvoltage

When the above conditions are cor- rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-

eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica- tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/ RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a prolonged time, have the system in- spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . The detectability of the radar sen- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de- tectionmaybe impaired and the system may not operate properly under the following conditions.

When the rear bumper around the radar sensors is distorted When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors When stickers, etc. are affixed on the areas of the radar sensors on the rear bumper During adverse weather condi- tions such as rain, snow or fog When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads and through puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or may have difficulty detecting the fol- lowing.

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe- destrians, stationary objects on the road or road side, etc. Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA7-52

(331,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

with a low body height such as sports cars or a trailer with no cargo) Vehicles that are not approaching your vehicle even though they are in the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the rear or be- side your vehicle when reversing) (The system determines the pre- sence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the radar sensors.) Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds Vehicles driving in parallel at al- most the same speed as your vehi- cle for a prolonged time Oncoming vehicles Vehicles in a lane beyond the neighboring lane Vehicles travelling at a signifi- cantly lower speed that you are trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow lanes, the system may detect vehicles driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane. . When the 8-inch audio/navigation system is performing a software up- date, the RCTA warning icons may not be displayed on the audio/navigation screen until the update is complete.

& BSD/RCTA approach indica- tor light/warning buzzer

S07BM03 When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/ RCTA approach indicator light will operate to alert the driver when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes. When reversing the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and warning buzzer will operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side. ! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

S07BM0301

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light It is mounted in each side of the outside mirrors. The indicator light will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is de- tected. The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following conditions. . While the indicator light illuminates, if you operate the turn signal lever toward the side in which this light turned on. . When reversing the vehicle while the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light dimming function

S07BM030101

When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE . You may have difficulty recognizing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light under the following conditions.

When affected by direct sunlight When affected by the headlight beams from the vehicles behind

. While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/ RCTA approach indicator light will not be reduced. For details about the illumination brightness control dial, refer to Illumination brightness con- trol F3-12.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA 7-53

7

(332,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz- zer (only when reversing)

S07BM0302 A warning buzzer sounds along with flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in- dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume can be changed by operating the combi- nation meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to Menu screens F3-39. ! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning buzzer

S07BM0303 . In the following cases, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.

When a vehicle moves to the neigh- boring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades When going beyond a pass When both your vehicle and a vehicle driving on a neighboring lane are driving on the far side of each lane. When several narrowly-spaced ve- hicles are approaching in a row In low radius bends (tight bends or when making turns at an intersection)

When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighboring lane Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA OFF switch Immediately after the shift lever/ select lever is shifted to the R position When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the trunk or cargo area

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/ RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings under the following conditions.

When backing out of an angled parking space When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.) When reversing on sloped roads When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may illuminate when driving close to solid objects on the road or road side (such as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls). . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash when turning at an inter- section in urban areas or a multilane intersection. . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the warning buzzer may sound if a building or a wall exists in the reversing direction. . In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.

When you are driving on the near side of its lane from the corresponding vehicle

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA7-54

(333,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

When the vehicle driving two lanes away is driving on the near side of its lane from your vehicle

& BSD/RCTA OFF indicator S07BM08

! System temporary stops S07BM0801

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message 2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is used under the following conditions. . Extremely high or low temperatures . When abnormal voltage exists for the vehicle battery . When the radar sensor is significantly misaligned

Once the above conditions are corrected, the system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis- appear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer. ! System temporary stops due to

reduced radar sensitivity S07BM0802

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stopmessage due to reduced radar sensitivity

2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectabil- ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once the condition is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains displayed for a pro- longed time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

& BSD/RCTA warning indicator S07BM04

! System malfunction S07BM0403

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message 2) At first, this message will appear 3) Then this message will appear 4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA 7-55

7

(334,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& BSD/RCTA OFF switch S07BM05

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type A)

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type B) If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on the combination meter, and the BSD/ RCTA is deactivated. Press the switch again to activate the BSD/ RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will disappear. When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap- proach indicator light on the side of the rearview mirror illuminates for a few seconds and then turns off.

NOTE . In the following cases, the system may not operate properly due to blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/ RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the system.

When a bicycle carrier or other item is fitted to the rear of the vehicle When using a chassis dynam- ometer or free roller device, etc. When running the engine and making the wheels rotate while lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position, the last known status of the system is maintained. For example, if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK/OFF position with the BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA will remain deactivated the next time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA7-56

(335,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Certification for the BSD/ RCTA

S07BM06 . U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de- vice may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA 7-57

7

(336,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Mexico-spec. models S07BM0603

& Handling of radar sensors S07BM07

1) Radar sensors (sedan)

1) Radar sensors (5-door models)

The radar sensors, one on each side of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper. To ensure correct operation of the BSD/ RCTA, observe the following precautions. . Always keep the bumper surface near the radar sensors clean. . Do not affix any stickers or other items on the bumper surface near the radar sensors. . Do not modify the bumper near the radar sensors. . Do not paint the bumper near the radar sensors. . Do not expose the bumper near the radar sensors to strong impacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the in- ability to detect vehicles entering the detection areas. If any strong shock is applied to the bumper, be sure to contact your SUBARU dealer for inspection. . Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

NOTE If the radar sensors require repair or replacement, or the bumper area around the radar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, con- tact your SUBARU dealer for assis- tance.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA7-58

(337,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Reverse Automatic Braking System (if equipped)

S07BN

Reverse Automatic Braking is a system designed to help avoid collisions or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warning sound and may activate the vehicles brakes auto- matically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking is not a system intended to replace the drivers responsibility to check surrounding areas for vehicles or obstacles to avoid a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driv- ing safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings visually when reversing the vehicle.

. There are some cases in which the vehicle cannot avoid colli- sion, because the system opera- tion has limitations. The warning sound or automatic braking may be delayed or may not operate at all even when an obstacle is present.

. The system is not designed to detect people (including chil- dren), animals or other moving objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi- tion or the surrounding environ- ment, the sonar sensors ability to detect objects may be compro- mised.

NOTE The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys- tem records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, per- sonal information or other audio data. . Distance from the object . Vehicle speed . Accelerator pedal operation status . Brake pedal operation status . Select lever position . Outside temperature . The sensitivity setting of the sonar sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehi- cle research and development. SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARUwill not disclose or provide

the acquired data to any other third party except under the following con- ditions. . The vehicle owner has given his/her consent. . The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally en- forceable request. . Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identi- fied is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking System overview

S07BN01 The system detects objects using sonar sensors installed in the rear bumper. . If the system determines a possible collision with an object in the reversing direction, automatic deceleration will be activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti- vate. . If the vehicle is further reversed, auto- matic hard braking will be applied and a continuous beeping sound will activate.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System 7-59

7

(338,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

1) When reversing 2) When either strong automatic braking or

torque control is applied to prevent collision (in this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound)

3) When the vehicle is stopped by the system (in this case, the continuous beep will remain sounding)

4) Object (e.g., a wall)

! Detecting range S07BN0101

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect: Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail- road crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may re- cognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and the brakemay activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or cancel the system. To

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System7-60

(339,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

cancel the system, refer to Cancel- ing the Reverse Automatic Braking system operation F7-66.

& Operating conditions S07BN02

The Reverse Automatic Braking system will operate when all of the following conditions are met.

1) EyeSight warning indicator 2) RAB warning indicator 3) RAB OFF indicator

. The ignition switch is in the ON position . The EyeSight warning indicator is off . The RAB warning indicator is off . HALT (RAB OFF) indicator is off

. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys- tem is set to on . The select lever is in the R position . The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)

NOTE . In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic braking system will not operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

The EyeSight warning indicator is illuminated The Reverse Automatic Braking fail indicator is illuminated

. When the Reverse Automatic Brak- ing system OFF indicator is illumi- nated, the Reverse Automatic braking system cannot be operated. . In the following cases, the system may not be able to properly detect an obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

A sticker, paint, or a chemical is applied to the sonar sensor or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor The rear bumper is modified The rear bumper has been re- moved and reattached The ground clearance is changed due to the vehicles loading condi- tion or modification

Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed

. When the 8-inch audio/navigation system is performing a software up- date, the Reverse Automatic Braking System may not display the following items on the audio/navigation screen until the update is complete.

Display Icon on/off Function Distance Indicator Image Warning Message

. On a steep hill, the systems auto- matic braking ability will be reduced. . The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard braking when the vehicles reversing speed is less than approximately 3mph (5 km/h). However, the system does not guaran- tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid collisions in any situation. . If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the drivers operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic braking will not oper- ate.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System 7-61

7

(340,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. The systemmaynot be able to detect the following objects

Sharp or thin objects such as poles, fences and ropes which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor Objects that are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever is set to the R position Objects with a surface whichmay not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor such as a chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed to detect

Pedestrians Moving objects includingmoving vehicles Objects which absorb sound waves such as cloth or snow Objects whose surface has a diagonal angle Objects that are low to the ground such as parking blocks Objects that are high above the ground such as objects hanging from above

. The system may not be able to properly detect objects or may cause a system malfunction when the follow- ing conditions exist

High frequency sound from other sources are nearby Horn sound from another vehicle Engine sound from other vehi- cles Sound of an air brake Vehicle detection equipment or a sonar from another vehicle A sound wave with a frequency similar to the vehicles system is transmitted nearby A vehicle equipped with the same system is reversing toward your reversing direction

Weather conditions Extremely high or extremely low temperatures in which the area near the sonar sensor becomes too hot or too cold to operate The rear bumper near the sonar sensors is exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc. Air is moving rapidly such as when a strong wind is blowing

Parts attached to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor Commercial electronic parts (fog light, fender pole, radio antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trai- ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard) are attached Parts that emit high frequency sound, such as a horn or speaker, are attached

Vehicle conditions The vehicle is significantly in- clined The ground clearance is signifi- cantly reduced due to the vehicles loading condition, etc. When the sonar sensor is mis- aligned due to a collision or an accident

Surrounding environment A cloth banner, flag, hanging branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direc- tion When reversing on a gravel or grassy area When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tunnels, narrow bridges, narrow roads or

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System7-62

(341,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

narrow garages Wheel tracks or a hole is present in the ground of the reversing direction When reversing over a drainage cover (grate cover)

The path of the reversing direc- tion is inclined such as on a steep uphill A curb is present in the reversing direction When reversing downhill

When reversing on an uneven road

. In circumstances such as the follow- ing, it may not be possible to avoid a collision even when the system oper- ates normally.

The tire air pressure is not cor- rect. The tires have become worn. Tires which are not the desig- nated size are installed. Emergency repairs were per-

formed using a puncture repair kit. The suspension was modified. Tire chains are installed. Vehicle driving is unstable due to accident or malfunction. The brake warning light is illumi- nated.

& Reverse Automatic Braking System operation

S07BN03 When the Reverse Automatic Braking System is in operation, the range between the vehicle and the detected object will be indicated on the audio/navigation monitor. Also, warning sounds will activate in 3 levels to warn the driver of a potential collision. While the RAB is operating, a warning message is displayed on the audio/navi- gation monitor and the combination meter display (color LCD).

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System 7-63

7

(342,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Guideline of detecting range Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob- ject detected) 35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)

28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert (approaching closer to the object)

20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)

20 inches (50 cm) or less Red Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

! Obstacle detected and alert level S07BN0301

Long proximity alert (object detected) 1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more

Medium proximity alert (approaching the object) 1) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System7-64

(343,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Short proximity alert (approaching the object closer) 1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object) 1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever- sing direction, the range of detected object will be shown on the audio/navigation monitor. A warning alarm will sound and, depend- ing on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied. ! Object close behind warning

S07BN0302

Automatic braking warning 1) Warning message

If the vehicle continues to go in reverse, the system may determine the risk of collision with the object. In this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and either strong auto- matic braking or torque control will be applied to prevent collision.

! When the vehicle is being stopped by the system

S07BN0303

Depress brake pedal warning 1) Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the audio/navigation monitor and the continuous beep will remain sounding. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter dis- play (color LCD).

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System 7-65

7

(344,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! After the vehicle is stopped by the system

S07BN0304

RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned OFF. After the brake pedal is depressed, the Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator will illuminate and the system will temporarily stop operating. The Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator will turn off when the select lever is shifted to a position other than the R position. The system will operate again the next time the select lever is shifted to R position. In circumstances such as the following, the Reverse Automatic Braking system auto- matically stops operating and the Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator

illuminates. There is ice, snow, mud, or other substance on the sonar sensors. The select lever was shifted to R when there is an obstacle located close to the rear bumper. A sound with a frequency close to that of the sonar used by the Reverse Auto- matic Braking system was detected.

NOTE Automatic braking only holds the vehi- cle for 2 seconds. Before the automatic brake is released, a warning sound (3 short beeps followed by a long beep) will activate to alert the driver that the automatic will be released.

& Canceling the Reverse Auto- matic Braking system opera- tion

S07BN04 The Reverse Automatic Braking system can be temporarily canceled by any of the following operations. . depressing the brake pedal* . depressing the accelerator pedal* . depressing the accelerator pedal hard (in this case, limited acceleration will be canceled and the vehicle will continue reversing.) . shifting the select lever to a position

other than the R position.

*: while the vehicle is stopped by the automatic braking

NOTE The system will be canceled if the object is no longer detected.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System7-66

(345,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF setting

S07BN05 While the select lever is shifted to the R position, the below functions of the Re- verse Automatic Braking system can be set by operating the audio/navigation monitor.

1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic Braking

2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic Braking

3) ON setting key of the object detection warning beeping sound

4) OFF setting key of the object detection warning beeping sound

When the ON setting key is shown, the corresponding setting is ON. Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn the setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the corresponding setting is OFF. Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn the setting ON.

When the Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned OFF, the following in- dicator will illuminate.

RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned OFF.

RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned ON.

NOTE . When the settings cannot be chan- ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed out. . The ON/OFF setting key may be greyed out if the Reverse Automatic Braking system malfunctions, etc. In this case, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position and then turn it to the ON position again. If the setting cannot be changed even after turning the ignition switch to the ON position again, consult your SUBARU dealer. . The settings will be restored as follows when the select lever is shifted to the R position next time.

Reverse Automatic Braking sys- tem settings: default (ON setting) Object detection warning beep- ing sound: the setting selected by operating the combination meter display (color LCD)

Also, the following settings can be chan- ged by operating the combination meter display (color LCD). . Warning volume . Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF

For details, refer to Menu screens F3- 39.

CONTINUED

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System 7-67

7

(346,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& RAB warning indicator S07BN07

1) RAB malfunction message 2) RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking System malfunctions, the above indicator illumi- nates on the combination meter. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Handling of the sonar sen- sors

S07BN06 The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear bumper. To ensure the proper operation of the Reverse Automatic Braking system, observe the following precautions.

Sedan

5-door models . Do not affix any stickers or other items on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface near the sonar sensors. . Always keep the sonar sensor and the rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean. . Do not modify the rear bumper. . Do not paint the bumper near the sonar sensors. . Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunc- tion may occur, including inability to detect objects in the reversing direction. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected. . Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System7-68

(347,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

NOTE If the sonar sensors require repair or replacement, or if the area of the rear bumper near the sonar sensors re- quires repair, paintwork or replace- ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System 7-69

7

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6 Left Page

(349,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S08 New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ................................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ................................................ 8-2 Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............... 8-2 Catalytic converter.................................................. 8-3 Periodic inspections............................................... 8-4 Driving in foreign countries ................................... 8-4 Driving tips for AWD models ................................. 8-4 Winter driving.......................................................... 8-6

Operation during cold weather ............................... 8-6 Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................. 8-8

Corrosion protection...............................................8-8 Snow tires ..............................................................8-9 Tire chains .............................................................8-9 Rocking the vehicle .............................................. 8-10

Loading your vehicle............................................ 8-10 Vehicle capacity weight ........................................ 8-11 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-11

Roof rail (if equipped) ........................................... 8-12 Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped) .............. 8-13 Roof tent (5-door models with roof rails) ............... 8-14

Trailer towing ........................................................ 8-16

Driving tips

8

(350,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Newvehiclebreak-indriving the first 1,000miles (1,600km)

S08AA

The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km): . Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency. . Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed, either fast or slow. . Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac- celeration, except in an emergency. . Avoid hard braking, except in an emer- gency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints S08AB

The following suggestions will help to save fuel. . Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- tion. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possi- ble. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine. . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption. . Use the air conditioner only when necessary. . Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment. . Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

S08AC

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dan- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas fromentering the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve- hicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is un- avoidable, then use the ventila- tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system al- ways works properly.

Driving tips/New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)8-2

(351,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid (sedan) or rear gate (5-door models) closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the ex- haust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sound is normal.

Catalytic converter S08AD

The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to reduceHC, COandNOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: . Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter. . Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle. . Avoid racing the engine. . Never turn the ignition switch to the OFF position while the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (misfiring, back- firing or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer. . Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust sys- tem. . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g., grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high tempera- tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Driving tips/Catalytic converter 8-3

8

(352,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Periodic inspections S08AE

To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recom- mended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet per- formed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

Driving in foreign countries S08AF

When planning to use your vehicle in another country: . Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. Refer to Fuel requirements F7-3. . Comply with all regulations and require- ments of each country.

Driving tips for AWD models S08AG

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden brak- ing or under other similar condi- tions.

. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence be- cause you are driving an All- Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing tire (s), all four tiresmust be the same for following items. (a) Size (b) Circumference (c) Speed symbol (d) Load index (e) Construction (f) Manufacturer (g) Brand (tread pattern) (h) Degrees of wear For the items (a) to (d), you must obey the specification that is

Driving tips/Periodic inspections8-4

(353,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the drivers door pillar. If all of four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious me- chanical damage could occur to the drive train of your car, and affect the following. Ride Handling Braking Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration Clearance between the body

and tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizesmay result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD models provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force during decel- eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the follow- ing tips in mind.

. An AWD model is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, how- ever, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles. . Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side. . Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded with water. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions such as steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the follow- ing items than that specified in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet.

Engine oil Brake fluid Rear differential gear oil Manual transmission oil (MT mod- els) Continuously variable transmission

CONTINUED

Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models 8-5

8

(354,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

fluid (CVT models) Front differential gear oil (CVT models)

. There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detailed information, refer to Towing F9-14.

Winter driving S08AI

& Operation during cold weath- er

S08AI01

! Maintenance S08AI0105

Carry some emergency equipment, such as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem- peratures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine in very cold weather conditions. Use an engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil will make it harder to start the engine. Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con- tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- perature varies according to howmuch it is diluted, as indicated in the following table.

Washer Fluid Con- centration Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F (128C)

50% 48F (208C)

100% 498F (458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid, check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid concentration to the outside temperature. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

Driving tips/Winter driving8-6

(355,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen- tration appropriately for the out- side temperature. If the concen- tration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti- freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti- freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicles paint, wiper blades or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle S08AI0101

Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu- mulated under the fenders to avoidmaking steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically. ! Parking in cold weather

S08AI0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.

. Under either of the following conditions, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action.

When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily covered with snow

When the vehicle has been left parked during a snowstorm

Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the ve- hicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following tips. 1. For MT models, place the shift lever in the 1 or R position. For CVT models, place the select lever in the P position. 2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weather S08AI0103

To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an anti- freeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

CONTINUED

Driving tips/Winter driving 8-7

8

(356,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity. & Driving on snowy and icy

roads S08AI02

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- hances your vehicles braking perfor- mance on snowy and icy roads. For information on braking on slippery sur- faces, refer to ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) F7-33 and Vehicle Dynamics Control system F7-35.

WARNING

For models with cruise control: Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause loss of vehi- cle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engines intake system and may hinder the airflow, which could re- sult in engine shutdown or even breakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowing S08AI0201

Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the windshield or rear window, perform the following procedure. . To thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow selection in and the temperature set for maximum warmth until the wiper blade rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to Climate control F4-1.

. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-88. . To thaw the rear wiper blade rubber, use the rear window defogger. Refer to Defogger and deicer F3-88.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the airflow selection in and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer. Refer to Windshield washer F3-77.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer to Hazard warning flasher F3-8.

& Corrosion protection S08AI03

Refer to Corrosion protection F10-4.

Driving tips/Winter driving8-8

(357,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

& Snow tires S08AI04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win- ter tire(s), all four tires must be the same for following items. (a) Size (b) Circumference (c) Speed symbol (d) Load index (e) Construction (f) Manufacturer (g) Brand (tread pattern) (h) Degrees of wear For the items (a) to (d), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the drivers door pillar. If all of four winter tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could occur to the drive train of your car, and affect the following. Ride Handling Braking

Speedometer/Odometer cali- bration

Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires as original equipment, which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking perfor- mance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. When you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construc- tion, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous hand- ling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.

& Tire chains S08AI05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clear- ance between the tires and vehicle body.

NOTE Even though you cannot use tire chains, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if use on your vehicle is recommended by the device manufac- turer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturers instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty.

CONTINUED

Driving tips/Winter driving 8-9

8

(358,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the front wheels only. Always use the utmost care when drivingwith a traction device. Overconfidence be- cause you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle S08AI06

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel- erator pedal slightly and move the shift lever/select lever back and forth between 1/D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT models).

If your vehicle is a CVT model, for information about holding the transmission in the 2nd position, refer to Selection of manual mode F7-26.

Loading your vehicle S08AJ

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback, in the trunk or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.

WARNING

. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehi- cles center of gravity andmake it more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting for- ward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle8-10

(359,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

. Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seatback (for sedan) or the extended cargo area cover (for 5-door models). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause ser- ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

NOTE For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight S08AJ01

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a roof rack or bike carrier, etc.,

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve- hicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

S08AJ02

Certification label

CONTINUED

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-11

8

(360,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The certification label attached to the bottom of drivers side door pillar shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- pending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle including standard equipment, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle capacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- tions. Replacement tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof rail (if equipped) S08AJ04

1) Crossbar Cargo can be carried on the roof after securing the crossbars to the roof rails and installing an appropriate carrying attach- ment. When installing crossbars and a carrying attachment, follow the manufac- turers instructions. The roof rail system is designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment) of no more than 150 lbs (68 kg). Be sure not to exceed your vehicles GVWR and GAWR.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle8-12

(361,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

CAUTION

. When using a carrying attach- ment, make sure that the total carrying load of the cargo, cross- bars and carrying attachment does not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle.

. For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rails must be used together with the crossbars and any ap- propriate carrying attachment that may be needed. The roof rails must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, da- mage to the roof or paint, or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

NOTE Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting driving characteristics. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

& Roofmolding andcrossbar (if equipped)

S08AJ06

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the roof molding must be used to- gether with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying at- tachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attach- ment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Over- loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety hazard.

Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and installing the appropriate carrying attach- ment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturers instructions.

When carrying cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and carrying attachments, never exceed the maximum load limit as explained below. You should also be careful that the vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). For information about loading cargo into or onto your vehicle, refer to Loading your vehicleF8-10. The maximum total load on the roof (including crossbars, carrying attachments and car- go) must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Refer to the crossbar installation instruc- tions for the maximum crossbar capacity. Place the heaviest load at the bottom, close to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

CONTINUED

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-13

8

(362,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

! Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars

S08AJ0601 When installing any carrying attachments such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc., follow the manufacturers instructions of the load capacity and make sure that the attachments are securely installed. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. Before oper- ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the crossbars

S08AJ0602

Each of the two roof moldings has two mounting points for crossbars. Each mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use a screwdriver to remove the covers. When installing the crossbars on the roof mold- ing, follow the manufacturers instructions.

& Roof tent (5-doormodelswith roof rails)

S08AJ14

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicles roof can adversely affect handling, brak- ing, and rollover resistance. The vehicle must never be driven with a total roof rail load in excess of 176 lbs (80 kg).

CAUTION

. The roof rail load limit for sta- tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg)) applies only when the vehicle is parked and the load is evenly distributed left/right and front/

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle8-14

(363,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

rear and the roof crossbars and roof tent are tightly secured to the vehicle. If these conditions are not met, the load limit will be lower.

. The maximum load limit of the roof crossbars must be obtained from the manufacturer or retailer of the roof rack. When driving the vehicle, the maximum roof rail load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the crossbar load limit (whichever is lower).

. Roof tents can only be used on vehicles originally equipped with roof rails. Otherwise, damage to the vehicles roof may occur.

On vehicles equipped with roof rails, roof tents may be used under certain condi- tions at your own risk. ! When driving the vehicle

S08AJ1401 The total weight on the roof rails, including the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not exceed the vehicles roof rail load of 176 lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.

A: Roof rails B: Roof crossbars C: Roof tent B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)

! When the vehicle is parked on level ground

S08AJ1402

A: Roof rails B: Roof crossbars C: Roof tent D: Occupants in the roof tent

CONTINUED

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-15

8

(364,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

The total weight on the roof rails including the roof crossbars, roof tent, and all occupants and contents in the roof tent must not exceed either the vehicles roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly distributed, or the load limit of the roof crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A). B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause damage to the vehicle or racking system. The vehicle must never be driven with occupants in the roof tent. Before the vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo must be removed from the roof tent and the roof rail load must be restored to within the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg). Refer to the user manual that accompa- nied the roof tent for important safety information and instructions on the proper installation and use of the tent.

Trailer towing S08AL

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer tow- ing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that may result from trailer towing, from any trailer towing equipment or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment. SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing.

Driving tips/Trailer towing8-16

(367,1)

Model "A1350BE-A" EDITED: 2018/ 4/ 20

S09 If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency............................................................ 9-2

Temporary spare tire .............................................. 9-2 Maintenance tools................................................... 9-3

Tool locations ........................................................ 9-4 Using the jack........................................................ 9-5

Flat tires................................................................... 9-6 Changing a flat tire ................................................ 9-6 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) .............................................9-10

Jump starting ........................................................ 9-11 How to jump start ................................................. 9-11

Engine overheating............................................... 9-13 If steam is coming from the engine compartment ......................................................9-13

If no steam is coming from the engine compartment ..................................................... 9-13

Towing ................................................................... 9-14 Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes............... 9-14 Using a flat-bed truck ........................................... 9-17 Towing with all wheels on the ground ................... 9-18

Access key fob if access key fob does not operate properly ................................................ 9-18 Locking and unlocking ......................................... 9-19 Switching power status ........................................ 9-19 Starting engine ..................................................... 9-19

Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be opened................................................................ 9-20

Moonroof (if equipped) if the moonroof does not